SlideShare a Scribd company logo
Welcome to
Astronomy/Astrophysics Olympiad Camp
Sukalyan Bachhar
B.Sc.Engg.(Mech.) & M.Sc.Engg.(Mech.), BUET
Senior Curator
National Museum of Science & Technology
Ministry of Science & Technology
Agargaon, Sher-E-Bangla Nagar, Dhaka-1207.
Website: www.nmst.gov.bd
&
Member, Bangladesh Astronomical Association
 Short bio-data:
 First Class Graduate in Mechanical Engineering from BUET [1993].
 Master of Science in Mechanical Engineering from BUET [1998].
 Field of specialization  Fluid Mechanics.
 Field of personal interest  Astrophysics.
 Field of real life activity  Popularization of Science & Technology from1995.
 Experienced in supervising for multiple scientific or research projects.
 Habituated as science speaker.
 17th BCS qualified.
 Member of Various Science & Engineering Societies
1
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp
মহাবিশ্বে মহাকাশ্বে মহাকাল-মাশ্বে,
আবম মানি একাকী ভ্রবম বিস্মশ্ব়ে ….
2
In the universe, in space, in time,
I human travel alone in wonder ….
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp - Syllabus
Theoretical and Practical Syllabus
Basic Astrophysics
➢Celestial Mechanics
➢Newton’s Laws of Gravitation, Kepler’s Laws For Circular And Non-circular Orbits, Roche Limit,
Barycentre, 2-body Problem, Lagrange Points.
➢Electromagnetic Theory & Quantum Physics
➢Electromagnetic Spectrum, Radiation Laws, Blackbody Radiation.
➢Thermodynamics
➢Thermodynamic Equilibrium, Ideal Gas, Energy Transfer.
➢Spectroscopy and Atomic Physics
➢Absorption, Emission, Scattering, Spectra of Celestial Objects, Doppler Effect, Line Formations,
Continuum Spectra, Splitting And Broadening of Spectral Lines, Polarization.
➢Nuclear Physics
➢Basic Concepts Including Structure of An Atom, Mass Defect And Binding Energy Radioactivity,
Neutrinos (Q).
3
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp - Syllabus
Theoretical and Practical Syllabus
Coordinates and Times
➢Celestial Sphere
➢Spherical Trigonometry, Celestial Coordinates And Their Applications, Equinox And Solstice, Circumpolar
Stars, Constellations And Zodiac.
➢Concept of Time
➢Solar Time, Sidereal Time, Julian Date, Heliocentric Julian Date, Time Zone, Universal Time, Local Mean
Time, Different Definitions of “Year”, Equation of Time
Solar System
➢The Sun
➢Solar Structure, Solar Surface Activities, Solar Rotation, Solar Radiation And Solar Constant, Solar
Neutrinos (Q), Sun-earth
➢Relations, Role of Magnetic Fields (Q), Solar Wind And Radiation Pressure, Heliosphere (Q),
Magnetosphere (Q).
➢The Solar System
➢Earth-moon System, Precession, Nutation, Libration, Formation And Evolution of The Solar System
(Q), Structure And Components of The Solar System (Q), Structure And Orbits of The Solar System
Objects, Sidereal And Synodic Periods, Retrograde Motion, Outer Reaches of The Solar System (Q),
Eclipse & Transit. 4
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp - Syllabus
Theoretical and Practical Syllabus
Space Exploration
➢ Satellite Trajectories And Transfers, Human Exploration of The Solar System (Q), Planetary Missions
(Q), Sling-shot Effect of Gravity, Space-based Instruments (Q).
➢ Phenomena
➢ Tides, Seasons, Eclipses, Aurorae (Q), Meteor Showers. Stars
➢ Stellar Properties
➢ Methods of Distance Determination, Radiation, Luminosity And Magnitude, Color Indices And
Temperature, Determination of Radii And Masses, Stellar Motion, Irregular And Regular Stellar
Variabilities – Broad Classification & Properties, Cepheids & Period-luminosity Relation, Physics of
Pulsation (Q).
➢ Stellar Interior and Atmospheres
➢ Stellar Equilibrium, Stellar Nucleosynthesis, Energy Transportation (Q), Boundary Conditions, Stellar
Atmospheres And Atmospheric Spectra.
➢ Stellar Evolution
➢ Stellar Formation, Hertzsprung-Russell Diagram, Pre-main Sequence, Main Sequence, Post-main
Sequence Stars, Supernovae, Planetary Nebulae, End States of Stars.
5
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp - Syllabus
Theoretical and Practical Syllabus
Stellar Systems
➢Binary Star Systems
➢Different Types of Binary Stars, Mass Determination In Binary Star Systems, Light And Radial Velocity Curves of
Eclipsing Binary Systems, Doppler Shifts In Binary Systems, Interacting Binaries, Peculiar Binary Systems.
➢ Exoplanets
➢ Techniques Used to Detect Exoplanets.
➢Star Clusters
➢Classification And Structure, Mass, Age, Luminosity And Distance Determination.
➢Milky Way Galaxy
➢Structure And Composition, Rotation, Satellites of the Milky Way (Q).
➢Interstellar Medium
➢Gas (Q), Dust (Q), Hii Regions, 21cm Radiation, Nebulae (Q), Interstellar Absorption, Dispersion Measure, Faraday
Rotation.
➢Galaxies
➢Classifications Based on Structure, Composition And Activity, Mass, Luminosity And Distance Determination,
Rotation Curves.
➢Accretion Processes
➢Basic Concepts (Spherical And Disc Accretion) (Q), Eddington Luminosity.
6
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp - Syllabus
Theoretical and Practical Syllabus
Cosmology
➢ Elementary Cosmology
➢ Expanding Universe And Hubble’s Law, Cluster of Galaxies, Dark Matter, Dark Energy (Q),
Gravitational Lensing, Cosmic Microwave Background Radiation, Big Bang (Q), Alternative Models
of The Universe (Q), Large Scale Structure (Q), Distance Measurement At A Cosmological Scale,
Cosmological Redshift.
Instrumentation and Space Technologies
➢Multi-wavelength Astronomy
➢Observations In Radio, Microwave, Infrared, Visible, Ultraviolet, X-ray, And Gamma-ray Wavelength
Bands, Earth’s Atmospheric Effects.
➢Instrumentation
➢Telescopes And Detectors (E.G. Charge-coupled Devices, Photometers, Spectrographs),
Magnification, Focal Length, Focal Ratio, Resolving And Light-gathering Powers of Telescopes,
Geometric Model of Two Element Interferometer, Aperture Synthesis, Adaptive Optics,
Photometry, Astrometry.
7
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp - Syllabus
Theoretical and Practical Syllabus
Practical Part
This part consists of 2 sections: observations and data analysis sections. The theoretical part of the syllabus provides the
basis for all problems in the practical part.
The observations section focuses on the contestant’s experience in
1. Naked-eye observations.
2. Usage of sky maps and catalogues (note: any stars referred to by name rather than Bayer designation or catalogue
number must be on the list of IAU-approved star names; knowledge of the whole list is not required).
3. Application of coordinate systems in the sky, magnitude estimation, estimation of angular separation
4. Usage of basic astronomical instruments-telescopes and various detectors for observations but enough instructions
must be provided to the contestants. Observational objects may be from real sources in the sky or imitated sources
in the laboratory. Computer simulations may be used in the problems, but sufficient instructions must be provided
to the contestants.
The data analysis section focuses on the calculation and analysis of the astronomical data provided in the problems.
Additional requirements are as follows:
1. Proper identification of error sources, calculation of errors, and estimation of their influence on the final results.
2. Proper use of graph papers with different scales, e.g., polar and logarithmic papers. Transformation of the data to get
a linear plot and find the “Best Fit” line approximately.
3. Basic statistical analysis of the observational data.
4. Knowledge of the most common experimental techniques for measuring physical quantities mentioned in Part A.
8
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics
• 01. Newton’s Laws of Motion (Translational and Rotational)
Newton’s Laws of motion describe the relationship between a body and the forces acting upon it, along
with the body's motion in response to these forces. They are applicable to both translational and
rotational motion, but with different expressions for the variables involved.
• Newton’s First Law (Law of Inertia)
• (a) Translational Motion:
Statement: A body remains at rest, or moves with constant velocity unless acted upon by an external
force.
Mathematical form: ∑F = 0 (at equilibrium)
Where: F = external force (vector)
The object remains in a state of rest or uniform motion if no external force is applied.
• Rotational Motion:
Statement: A rigid body continues in a state of rest or uniform rotational motion about a fixed axis unless
acted upon by an external torque.
Mathematical form: ∑τ = 0 (at rotational equilibrium)
Where: τ = external torque. 9
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics
• Newton’s Second Law (Law of Acceleration)
• Translational Motion:
Statement: The net force acting on an object is equal to the mass of the object multiplied by its
acceleration.
Mathematical form: F = ma *[ Modern form: F = d/dt(p) ; where: Momentum, p = ma ]
Where: F = net force (vector)
m = mass of the object
a = acceleration (vector)
• Rotational Motion:
Statement: The net torque acting on a rigid body is equal to the moment of inertia of the body
multiplied by its angular acceleration.
Mathematical form: τ = Iα *[ Modern form: τ = d/dt(L) ; where: Angular momentum, L = r × p ]
Where: τ = net torque
I = moment of inertia
α = angular acceleration
10
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics
• Newton’s Third Law (Action and Reaction)
• Translational Motion:
Statement: For every action, there is an equal and opposite reaction.
Mathematical form: F12 = − F21
Where:
F12 is the force exerted by object 1 on object 2.
F21 is the equal and opposite force exerted by object 2 on object 1.
• Rotational Motion:
Statement: For every torque exerted by one object on another, there is an equal and opposite torque
exerted by the second object on the first.
Mathematical form: τ12 = − τ21
Where:
τ12 is the torque exerted by object 1 on object 2.
τ21 is the equal and opposite torque exerted by object 2 on object 1.
11
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics
• Celestial mechanics is a branch of physics that deals with the motions of celestial objects like
planets, stars, moons, and artificial satellites. Olympiad problems in celestial mechanics often
require a solid understanding of gravitational forces, orbits, and energy principles. Here's a
comprehensive guide with detailed equations and explanations:
• 02. Newton’s Law of Universal Gravitation:
This is the fundamental force governing the motion of all celestial bodies:
𝐹 = 𝐺𝑚1𝑚2/𝑟2
Where: 𝐹 is the gravitational force.
𝐺 is the gravitational constant (6.67430×10−11 Nm2/kg2 .
𝑚1 and 𝑚2 are the masses of the two objects.
𝑟 is the distance between the centers of the two masses.
This law forms the foundation of celestial mechanics and is crucial for understanding how celestial
bodies interact. 12
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics
• 03. Newton’s Second Law and Orbital Motion:
Newton's second law, combined with the gravitational force, gives the basis for the motion of objects in
orbits. The gravitational force acts as the centripetal force for objects in orbit:
𝐹 = 𝑚𝑣2/𝑟
Setting this equal to the gravitational force:
𝐺𝑀𝑚/𝑟2 = 𝑚𝑣2/r
This simplifies to:
𝑣 = (𝐺𝑀/𝑟)
Where: 𝑣 is the orbital velocity.
M is the mass of the central body (e.g., a planet or the Sun).
𝑟 is the distance between the orbiting object and the center of the central body.
Orbital Period for Circular Orbits:
For an object in a circular orbit, the orbital period 𝑇 (the time to complete one full orbit) is related to the
radius 𝑟 and the central mass 𝑀 by:
𝑇=2𝜋(𝑟3/𝐺𝑀)
This comes from Kepler’s Third Law (discussed in more detail below). 13
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics
•04. Kepler’s Laws of Planetary Motion:
•Kepler's First Law: Law of Ellipses
Planets move in elliptical orbits with the Sun at one focus. An ellipse is characterized by its semi-major
axis 𝑎a and eccentricity 𝑒.
The general equation of an ellipse in polar coordinates (with the Sun at the focus) is:
𝑟 = 𝑎(1 − 𝑒2)/(1 + 𝑒cos𝜃)
Where: 𝑟 is the distance from the Sun.
𝑎 is the semi-major axis.
e is the eccentricity.
𝜃 is the true anomaly, the angle between the position of the planet and the major axis.
•Kepler's Second Law: Law of Equal Areas
A line connecting a planet to the Sun sweeps out equal areas in equal time intervals, implying that
planets move faster when they are closer to the Sun (perihelion) and slower when they are farther away
(aphelion).
Areal velocity 𝑑𝐴/𝑑𝑡 is constant:
𝑑𝐴/𝑑𝑡 = (1/2)𝑟2𝑑𝜃/dt = constant
14
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics
• Kepler's Third Law: Law of Harmonies
The square of the orbital period 𝑇 is proportional to the cube of the semi-major axis 𝑎 of the orbit:
𝑇2 ∝ 𝑎3
For an object orbiting a star like the Sun:
𝑇2 = (4𝜋2/𝐺𝑀⊙)𝑎3
Where: 𝑇 is the orbital period.𝑎a is the semi-major axis.
𝑀⊙ is the mass of the Sun (or any central object for a general two-body system).
• 05. Escape Velocity:
• The escape velocity is the minimum velocity needed to escape from the gravitational influence of a
celestial body without any further propulsion. It is derived from equating kinetic energy with
gravitational potential energy:
Vesc = (2𝐺𝑀/r )
Where: Vesc is the escape velocity.
M is the mass of the celestial body (e.g., Earth, Moon).
r is the distance from the center of the body.
15
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics
•06. Orbital Energy:
The total mechanical energy of an object in orbit is the sum of its kinetic and potential energies:
𝐸 = (1/2)𝑚𝑣2 − 𝐺𝑀𝑚/𝑟
Using 𝑣 = (𝐺𝑀/𝑟) for circular orbits, the total energy per unit mass becomes:
𝐸 = − 𝐺𝑀/2𝑟
This negative energy indicates that the object is in a bound orbit (circular or elliptical). If the total
energy is zero or positive, the orbit is parabolic or hyperbolic, respectively (unbound orbit).
•Specific Orbital Energy for Elliptical Orbits
For an elliptical orbit, the total specific energy (energy per unit mass) is:
𝜖 = − 𝐺𝑀/2𝑎
Where: a is the semi-major axis of the elliptical orbit.
16
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics
• 07. Vis-Viva Equation (also referred to as orbital-energy-invariance law or Burgas
formula):
The Vis-Viva equation relates the speed of an orbiting object at any point in its orbit to its
distance from the central body and the semi-major axis (arising from conservation of
mechanical energy) :
𝑣 = [𝐺𝑀(2/𝑟 − 1/𝑎)]​
Where: 𝑣 is the speed of the object at a distance 𝑟r from the central body.
𝑎 is the semi-major axis.
𝑟 is the current distance from the central body.
This equation is useful for both elliptical and circular orbits, as well as determining velocities at
periapsis and apoapsis.
17
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics
• 08. Hohmann Transfer Orbit:
A Hohmann transfer orbit is the most efficient way to transfer between two circular orbits of
different radii. It uses two velocity changes (burns):
First Burn: At the periapsis of the transfer orbit (to leave the initial circular orbit):
Δ𝑣1 = (𝐺𝑀/𝑟1)( ((2𝑟2/(𝑟1 + 𝑟2)) − 1)
Second Burn: At the apoapsis of the transfer orbit (to enter the final circular orbit):
Δ𝑣2 = (𝐺𝑀/𝑟2) (1 −  (2𝑟1/(𝑟1 + 𝑟2) )
Where: 𝑟1 is the radius of the initial orbit.
𝑟2 is the radius of the final orbit.
18
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics
• 09. Geostationary Orbits
A geostationary orbit is one in which a satellite remains fixed relative to the surface of the Earth. For
such an orbit, the orbital period is 24 hours.
The radius of a geostationary orbit is:
rgeo = (GMT2/4π2)1/3
Where: T = 86400 seconds (24 hours). M is the mass of the Earth.
• 10. Lagrange Points
Lagrange points are positions in a two-body system (like the Earth and Moon)
where the gravitational forces of the two large bodies and the centrifugal
force balance, allowing an object to remain in a stable position relative to
the two bodies.
There are five Lagrange points L1, L2, L3, L4, L5 with L1, L2, and L3 along the line connecting the two
bodies. L4 and L5 form equilateral triangles with the two bodies and are stable points.
19
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics
•11. Tsiolkovsky Rocket Equation:
For problems involving the motion of rockets, the Tsiolkovsky rocket equation provides a way to
calculate the change in velocity (Δv) of a rocket:
Δv = veln(m0/mf
Where: ve is the effective exhaust velocity.
m0 is the initial mass of the rocket (including fuel).
mf is the final mass of the rocket (after fuel is burnt).
ln is the natural logarithm.
20
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics
• 12. Tidal Force:
•Definition of Tidal Force: Tidal force is the differential gravitational force exerted by one massive
body (like the Moon or Sun) on different parts of another body (like the Earth). This differential force
arises because the gravitational attraction is stronger on the side of the body closer to the attracting
object and weaker on the far side. The resulting difference causes the affected body to stretch,
producing tidal effects, such as ocean tides on Earth.
•Derivation of the Tidal Force Equation:
•Step 1: Gravitational Force Between Two Bodies
The gravitational force between two masses MMM (the mass of the attracting body) and mmm (the
mass of the affected body or a small point mass on it) at a distance rrr from each other is given by
Newton's law of gravitation:
F = GMm/r2
Where: F = gravitational force
G = gravitational constant (6.674×10−11 N⋅m2/kg2)
M = mass of the attracting body (e.g., Moon)
m = mass of the affected body or object (e.g., Earth, or a small point on Earth's surface)
r = distance between the centers of the two bodies
21
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics
•Step 2: Gravitational Force at Different Points on the Affected Body
The tidal force results from the difference in the gravitational force felt at different points on the
affected body. Let's consider two points:
One on the side of the affected body closest to the attracting body (the "near side")
One on the side farthest from the attracting body (the "far side").
For a body of radius RRR, the distance from the attracting body to these two points will be:
Near side: r−R
Far side: r+R
•Step 3: Gravitational Force on the Near and Far Sides
The gravitational force at the near side is: Fnear = GMm/(r−R)2
The gravitational force at the far side is: Ffar = GMm/(r+R)2
•Step 4: Difference in Forces (Tidal Force)
The tidal force Ftidal is the difference between the forces at the near side and the far side:
Ftidal = Fnear - Ffar
This expression is complicated, but for R≪r (i.e., when the size of the affected body is much smaller
than the distance between the two bodies), we can use a Taylor expansion to approximate this
difference. 22
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics
•Step 5: Approximation Using Taylor Expansion
For small R compared to r, the following approximation holds:
Ftidal ≈ 2GMmR/r3
Final Tidal Force Equation:
Ftidal ≈ 2GMmR/r3
Where: Ftidal = tidal force
G = gravitational constant
M = mass of the attracting body (e.g., Moon)
m = mass of the affected body (or a point on it)
R = radius of the affected body
r = distance between the centers of the two bodies
Key Insights:
The tidal force is proportional to the size of the affected body R, and it decreases rapidly with
the cube of the distance r between the two bodies.
This is why tidal forces are much stronger for objects that are close together, even if they are
relatively small.
23
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics
• 13. Roche Limit:
The Roche limit is the minimum distance to which a celestial body (like a moon or a satellite) can
approach a more massive body (like a planet) without being torn apart by tidal forces. When the tidal
forces (which stretch the object) exceed the object's own gravitational self-attraction (which holds it
together), the object will disintegrate.
The Roche limit is particularly relevant when studying planetary rings, moons, and tidal forces within
celestial systems.
Equation for the Roche Limit
The Roche limit d depends on the radii and densities of the two bodies involved. For a fluid satellite (a
body that can deform easily due to tidal forces) orbiting a planet, the Roche limit is given by:
𝑑 = 𝑅𝑝⋅2.44⋅(𝜌p/𝜌𝑠)1/3
Where: 𝑑 is the Roche limit (the minimum orbital distance).
𝑅𝑝 is the radius of the planet (the larger object).
𝜌p​ is the density of the planet.
𝜌𝑠 is the density of the satellite (the smaller object).
This equation is specifically for fluid bodies. For rigid bodies, the constant 2.442.44 is reduced to around
1.26.
24
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics
Explanation of the Terms:
• Tidal forces increase as the satellite gets closer to the planet, and they act to stretch the satellite.
• Gravitational self-attraction holds the satellite together. If tidal forces surpass the satellite’s self-
gravity, the satellite breaks apart.
For rocky bodies (e.g., moons or asteroids), the Roche limit is farther out than for fluid bodies
because rocky bodies are more resistant to tidal forces.
Picture Description:
Imagine a planet with a moon. The Roche limit is the point where the gravitational pull of the
planet on the near side of the moon is significantly stronger than the pull on the far side, creating a
strong tidal effect. If the moon crosses this limit, the differential forces become so extreme that the
moon would be pulled apart, forming rings around the planet (similar to Saturn’s rings).
Let me now create an illustration of this concept.
Here is the illustration of the Roche limit,
showing how a moon gets torn apart by tidal forces when it crosses
this critical distance near a planet. The diagram highlights tidal
forces, the planet's gravitational pull, and the formation of rings
as the moon breaks apart.
25
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics
• 14. Barycentre:
The barycenter is the center of mass of two or more bodies that are in orbit due to mutual gravitational
attraction. It is the point around which both bodies orbit, and its position depends on their masses.
Barycenter Equation:
For two objects with masses 𝑀1 and 𝑀2 separated by a distance 𝑑, the location of the barycenter
relative to the center of the first mass (𝑀1) is given by the formula:
𝑟1 =( 𝑀2/(𝑀1 + 𝑀2)) 𝑑
Where: 𝑟1 is the distance of mass 𝑀1 from the barycenter. 𝑀1 and 𝑀2 are the masses of the two
bodies.
d is the distance between the two bodies.
Similarly, the distance of the second mass 𝑀2​ from the barycenter is:
𝑟2 =( 𝑀1/(𝑀1 + 𝑀2)) 𝑑
26
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics
• Key Points:
The barycenter is closer to the more massive body.
If 𝑀1 = 𝑀2 , the barycenter lies exactly in the middle of the two bodies.
If one object is much more massive than the other (e.g., a star and a planet), the barycenter may lie inside
the larger body.
• Figure Description
Let me generate a figure that represents two masses orbiting their barycenter, with labeled distances from
the barycenter and arrows showing their motion.
Here is the illustration showing the barycenter in a two-body system,
with both masses orbiting around the central barycenter point.
The figure shows the relative distances from the barycenter to the
two masses, 𝑟1 and 𝑟2 , and the total distance 𝑑 between them.
The larger mass (M1) is closer to the barycenter, as expected.
27
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics
• 15. The 2-Body Problem:
An Overview: The 2-body problem is a classical problem in mechanics and astrophysics that seeks to
describe the motion of two bodies interacting under their mutual gravitational force. The problem is
based on Newton's laws of motion and Newton's law of universal gravitation.
Given two masses, m1 and m2, the gravitational force between them is proportional to the product of
their masses and inversely proportional to the square of the distance between them.
Equations of Motion:
Let’s define the position vectors of the two masses as r1(t) and r2(t).
The vector distance between the two bodies is:
r(t) = r1(t) - r2(t)
The magnitude of this vector is the distance between the two masses:
r = ∣r(t)∣
The gravitational force on mass m1 due to m2 is:
F12 = −(Gm1m2/r2) r^
Where G is the gravitational constant, and r^ is the unit vector pointing from mass m1 to m2.
28
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics
Newton's second law gives the following system of differential equations for the two masses:
m1d2r1/dt2 = − (Gm1m2/r3)(r1 − r2)
m2d2r2/dt2 = − (Gm1m2/r3)(r2 − r1)
Center of Mass and Reduced Mass
It’s convenient to solve the problem by transforming it into a center-of-mass (COM) reference frame. The
position of the center of mass RCM is given by:
RCM = (m1r1 + m2r2 )/(m1 + m2)
Defining the reduced mass μ:
μ = m1m2 /(m1 + m2)
This allows us to reduce the 2-body problem to a single-body problem where one mass μmuμ moves
under the influence of the central force.
The equation of motion for the relative position vector r is:
μdr2/dt2 = − (Gm1m2/r2) r^
This equation describes the motion of r(t), and its solution depends on the initial conditions. The resulting
motion is generally elliptical, as described by Kepler's laws of planetary motion.
29
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Electromagnetic Theory
• Electromagnetic theory explains how electric and magnetic fields are related and how they interact to
form electromagnetic waves. The foundation of this theory comes from Maxwell’s Equations, which describe
how these fields behave and how they influence each other.
•Key Concepts
1. Electric Field (𝐸):
An electric field is created by electric charges.
It exerts a force on other electric charges.
The strength of the electric field from a point charge 𝑄 is given by:
𝐸 = 𝑘𝑄/𝑟2
Where: 𝑘 = 9 × 109 N⋅m2/C2 , 𝑄 is the charge, and 𝑟 is the distance from the charge.
2. Magnetic Field (𝐵B):
A magnetic field is created by moving charges (like electric currents).
It exerts forces on moving charges or other magnets.
The magnetic field around a straight current-carrying wire is:
𝐵 = 𝜇0𝐼/2𝜋𝑟
Where: 𝜇0 = 4𝜋 × 10−7 T⋅m/A, 𝐼 is the current, and 𝑟 is the distance from the wire. 30
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Electromagnetic Theory
3. Electromagnetic Waves:
Electromagnetic waves are created when electric and magnetic fields change with time. These waves
move at the speed of light 𝑐 = 3 × 108 m/s. Light, radio waves, and X-rays are examples of electromagnetic
waves.
Maxwell’s Equations (Simplified):
Maxwell's Equations describe how electric and magnetic fields work together.
1. Gauss's Law for Electricity: Electric charges produce electric fields.
∮𝐸⋅𝑑𝐴 = 𝑄/𝜖0
𝑄 is the total charge, and 𝜖0 is the permittivity of free space.
2. Gauss's Law for Magnetism:
Magnetic field lines form closed loops; there are no isolated magnetic poles (no "magnetic charges").
∮𝐵⋅𝑑𝐴 = 0
3. Faraday’s Law of Induction:
A changing magnetic field creates an electric field.
∮𝐸⋅𝑑𝑙 = −𝑑/𝑑𝑡[∫𝐵⋅𝑑𝐴]
This principle is the basis for electric generators. 31
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Electromagnetic Theory
4. Ampère’s Law (with Maxwell's Correction):
A current or a changing electric field creates a magnetic field.
∮𝐵⋅𝑑𝑙 = μ0 𝐼 + μ0 𝜖0 𝑑/𝑑𝑡[∫𝐸⋅𝑑𝐴]
μ0 is the permeability of free space.
Electromagnetic Waves:
Electromagnetic waves consist of oscillating electric and magnetic fields.
These fields are perpendicular to each other and to the direction the wave is moving.
Electromagnetic waves travel at the speed of light, 𝑐, which can be calculated from the properties of
electric and magnetic fields:
𝑐 = 1/(μ0𝜖0 )
Where: μ0 is the permeability of free space and 𝜖0 is the permittivity of free space.
Key Equations Summary:
1. Electric Field from a Charge( From Coulomb’s law):
𝐸 = 𝑘𝑄/𝑟2
Where, 𝑘 is Coulomb's constant, 𝑄 is the charge, and 𝑟 is the distance.
32
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Electromagnetic Theory
2. Magnetic Field from a Current:
𝐵 = 𝜇0𝐼/2𝜋𝑟
Where: 𝜇0 is the permeability of free space, 𝐼 is the current, and 𝑟 is the distance from the current.
3. Speed of Light:
𝑐 = 1/(𝜇0𝜖0)
Where: 𝑐 is the speed of light, 𝜇0 is the permeability of free space, and 𝜖0 is the permittivity of free
space.
Conclusion:
Maxwell’s equations show how electric and magnetic fields are connected. When these fields change,
they can create electromagnetic waves, which include light, radio waves, and X-rays. Understanding these
concepts helps explain many modern technologies like radios, cell phones, and even how we see light!
33
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Quantum Physics
• Quantum physics is the branch of science that deals with the behavior of particles at very small scales,
such as atoms and subatomic particles like electrons and photons. It challenges our everyday understanding of
how things work because particles at this scale behave very differently from the objects we see in our daily
lives.
• Key Concepts in Quantum Physics
1. Quantization of Energy:
Energy is not continuous but comes in small, discrete packets called quanta. For example, light energy is
carried by particles called photons.
The energy of each photon is proportional to its frequency 𝑓, given by the formula:
𝐸 = ℎ𝑓
Where: 𝐸 is the energy of the photon, ℎ is Planck’s constant (6.626 × 10−34 J⋅s), and 𝑓 is the frequency of the
light.
2. Wave-Particle Duality:
Particles, like electrons, can behave as both particles and waves. For instance, light can act as a particle
(photon) in certain experiments, but it also behaves like a wave, exhibiting interference and diffraction. The
wavelength 𝜆 of a particle is related to its momentum 𝑝 by de Broglie’s equation:
p = ℎ/λ
Where: ℎ is Planck's constant, and 𝑝p is the particle’s momentum. 34
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Quantum Physics
3. Uncertainty Principle:
Introduced by Werner Heisenberg, it states that you cannot simultaneously know the exact position and
momentum of a particle.
The more precisely you know a particle's position 𝑥, the less precisely you can know its momentum 𝑝,
and vice versa. This relationship is given by:
Δ𝑥⋅Δ𝑝 ≥ ℎ/4𝜋
Where: Δ𝑥 is the uncertainty in position, Δ𝑝 is the uncertainty in momentum, and ℎ is Planck’s constant.
4. The Schrödinger Equation:
In quantum physics, the behavior of particles is described by a wave function 𝜓, which contains all the
information about the particle.
The Schrödinger equation governs how this wave function evolves over time. For a particle in one
dimension, it is written as:
𝑖ℏ∂𝜓/∂ 𝑡= −(ℏ2/2𝑚)∂2𝜓/∂𝑥2 + 𝑉(𝑥)𝜓
Where: 𝑖 is the imaginary unit, ℏ is the reduced Planck’s constant (ℏ = ℎ/2𝜋), 𝑚 is the particle’s mass,
and 𝑉(𝑥) is the potential energy.
35
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Quantum Physics
5. Superposition:
In quantum physics, particles can exist in multiple states at the same time, a concept called superposition.
For example, an electron in an atom can be in a superposition of being in two different energy levels.
Only when you measure the electron does it “choose” one state, which leads to the idea of wave function
collapse.
6. Quantum Entanglement:
When two particles become entangled, the state of one particle is directly related to the state of the other, no
matter how far apart they are. If you measure one entangled particle, the state of the other is instantly
determined, even if they are light-years apart. This phenomenon puzzled Einstein, who famously called it
"spooky action at a distance.“
Key Equations in Quantum Physics:
1. Planck's Equation (Energy of a Photon):
𝐸 = ℎ𝑓
E = energy of the photon, ℎ = Planck's constant, 𝑓 = frequency of the wave.
2. de Broglie Wavelength (Wave-Particle Duality):
𝜆 = ℎ/𝑝
λ = wavelength, ℎ = Planck’s constant, 𝑝 = momentum of the particle. 36
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Quantum Physics
3. Heisenberg's Uncertainty Principle:
Δ𝑥⋅Δ𝑝 ≥ ℎ/4𝜋
Δx = uncertainty in position, Δ𝑝 = uncertainty in momentum.
4. Schrödinger Equation (Time-Dependent):
𝑖ℏ∂𝜓/∂𝑡 = −(ℏ2/2𝑚)∂2𝜓∂𝑥2 +𝑉(𝑥)𝜓
𝜓 = wave function, ℏ = reduced Planck’s constant, 𝑉(𝑥) = potential energy, 𝑚 = mass of the particle.
•Applications of Quantum Physics:
Quantum Computing:
Uses the principles of superposition and entanglement to process information in ways that classical
computers cannot, potentially solving complex problems much faster.
Lasers:
Use the concept of quantized energy levels. Atoms in a laser get excited to higher energy levels and then
release photons of light in a controlled manner when they return to lower energy levels.
37
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Quantum Physics
Semiconductors: The behavior of electrons in materials like silicon is explained by quantum mechanics.
This understanding is the basis for modern electronics, including computers and smartphones.
Medical Imaging: Technologies like MRI (Magnetic Resonance Imaging) use quantum principles to create
detailed images of the inside of the human body.
Conclusion:
Quantum physics introduces strange but fundamental ideas about how the universe works at the
smallest scales. It explains phenomena that classical physics cannot, such as the behavior of electrons in
atoms, the nature of light, and the functioning of modern technology like lasers and semiconductors.
Understanding these principles opens up new ways to explore and utilize the fundamental building
blocks of the universe.
38
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Electromagnetic Spectrum
Electromagnetic Spectrum:
The electromagnetic spectrum encompasses all forms of electromagnetic radiation, which differ in
wavelength and frequency. This spectrum is crucial for understanding how energy travels through space and
interacts with matter. The electromagnetic spectrum is typically divided into several regions:
Regions of the Electromagnetic Spectrum:
Radio Waves: Wavelength: >10−1 m
Frequency: <3×109 Hz < 3 × 109 Hz
Uses: Communication (radio, television), radar.
Microwaves: Wavelength: 10−1 m10 −1 m to 10−3 m10 −3 m
Frequency: 3×109 Hz3×10 9 Hz to 3×1012 Hz3×10 12 Hz
Uses: Microwave ovens, satellite communication, radar.
Infrared Radiation: Wavelength: 10−3 m10 −3 m to 7×10−7 m7×10 −7 m
Frequency: 3 × 1012 Hz to 4.3 × 1014 Hz
Uses: Thermal imaging, remote controls, night-vision technology.
39
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Electromagnetic Spectrum
Visible Light: Wavelength: 7 × 10−7 m (red) to 4 × 10−7 m (violet)
Frequency: 4.3 × 1014 Hz to 7.5 × 1014 Hz
Uses: The range of light visible to the human eye; essential for vision.
Ultraviolet Radiation: Wavelength: 4×10−7 m4×10 −7 m to 10−8 m10 −8 m
Frequency: 7.5×1014 Hz7.5×10 14 Hz to 3×1016 Hz3×10 16 Hz
Uses: Sterilization, detecting counterfeit money, tanning.
X-rays: Wavelength: 10−8 m10 −8 m to 10−11 m10 −11 m
Frequency: 3×1016 Hz3×10 16 Hz to 3×1019 Hz3×10 19 Hz
Uses: Medical imaging, security scanning.
Gamma Rays: Wavelength: <10−11 m<10 −11 m
Frequency: >3×1019 Hz>3×10 19 Hz
Uses: Cancer treatment, sterilizing medical equipment, nuclear reactions.
Key Characteristics:
Speed of Light: All electromagnetic waves travel at the speed of light in a vacuum,
approximately 𝑐 = 3 × 108 m/s. 40
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Electromagnetic Spectrum
Frequency and Wavelength Relationship:
The frequency (𝑓) and wavelength (𝜆) of electromagnetic waves are inversely related:
𝑐 = 𝑓⋅𝜆
Energy: The energy of electromagnetic radiation is directly related to its frequency. Higher frequency
(shorter wavelength) radiation has more energy, as described by Planck's equation:
𝐸 = ℎ𝑓
Where: 𝐸 = energy, ℎ = Planck’s constant (6.626 × 10−34 J⋅s), 𝑓 = frequency.
Applications of the Electromagnetic Spectrum:
Communication: Radio and microwaves are essential for transmitting data wirelessly.
Medicine: X-rays are used for imaging, while gamma rays are used in cancer treatment.
Astronomy: Different wavelengths provide unique information about celestial objects.
Environmental Science: Infrared radiation is used in remote sensing to study Earth's surface.
Understanding the electromagnetic spectrum is vital for fields ranging from telecommunications to
healthcare, as it underlies much of modern technology and scientific research.
41
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Radiation Laws
• Radiation Laws:
Radiation laws describe the emission and behavior of electromagnetic radiation, particularly in relation to
temperature and the characteristics of radiating bodies. Here are the key radiation laws along with their
equations:
1. Planck’s Law:
Planck’s Law describes the spectral radiance of electromagnetic radiation emitted by a blackbody in
thermal equilibrium at a given temperature 𝑇.
Equation:
𝐼(𝜆,𝑇) = (2𝜋ℎ𝑐2/𝜆5)⋅1/(𝑒ℎ𝑐/𝜆𝑘𝑇− 1)
Where: 𝐼(𝜆,𝑇) = intensity of radiation at wavelength 𝜆 and temperature 𝑇.
ℎ = Planck’s constant (6.626 × 10−34 J⋅s).
𝑐 = speed of light (3 × 108 m/s)
𝑘 = Boltzmann’s constant (1.38 × 10−23 J/K).
𝜆 = wavelength.
𝑇 = absolute temperature in Kelvin.
42
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Radiation Laws
2. Stefan-Boltzmann Law:
The Stefan-Boltzmann Law states that the total energy radiated per unit surface area of a blackbody is
proportional to the fourth power of its absolute temperature.
Equation:
𝑗∗=𝜎𝑇4
Where: 𝑗∗ = total energy radiated per unit area.
𝜎 = Stefan-Boltzmann constant (5.67×10−8 W/m2⋅K4)
𝑇 = absolute temperature in Kelvin.
3. Wien's Displacement Law:
Wien's Displacement Law relates the temperature of a blackbody to the wavelength at which its emission
is maximized. It shows that as the temperature increases, the peak wavelength of emission decreases.
Equation:
𝜆max = 𝑏𝑇
Where: 𝜆max = wavelength of maximum emission.
𝑏 = Wien's displacement constant (2.898 × 10−3 m⋅K).
𝑇 = absolute temperature in Kelvin. 43
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Radiation Laws
• Applications of Radiation Laws:
Astrophysics: Understanding the temperature and composition of stars based on their radiation.
Climate Science: Modeling Earth's radiation balance and energy transfer.
Engineering: Designing thermal insulation and heat exchangers.
Medical Imaging: Using principles of radiation for X-ray and MRI technologies.
These laws provide a fundamental understanding of how objects emit radiation and are critical in various
scientific and engineering fields.
44
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Blackbody Radiation
• Blackbody Radiation:
Blackbody radiation refers to the electromagnetic radiation emitted by an idealized perfect blackbody,
which absorbs all incoming radiation and emits energy with a characteristic spectrum determined solely
by its temperature. The study of blackbody radiation is foundational in understanding thermal radiation
and quantum mechanics.
Key Concepts:
Perfect Absorber and Emitter: A blackbody does not reflect or transmit any radiation. It absorbs all
wavelengths and re-emits energy based on its temperature.
Spectrum: The radiation emitted by a blackbody is continuous and varies with temperature. As the
temperature increases, the intensity of radiation increases, and the peak wavelength shifts to shorter
wavelengths.
Key Equations:
Planck’s Law: 𝐼(𝜆,𝑇) = (2𝜋ℎ𝑐2/𝜆5)⋅1/(𝑒ℎ𝑐/𝜆𝑘𝑇− 1)
Stefan-Boltzmann Law: 𝑗∗ = 𝜎𝑇4
Wien's Displacement Law: 𝜆max = 𝑏𝑇
45
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Blackbody Radiation
Graph of Blackbody Radiation:
The graph of spectral radiance versus wavelength for a blackbody at different temperatures shows:
At lower temperatures, the peak of the curve is at longer wavelengths
(infrared).
As the temperature increases, the peak shifts to shorter wavelengths
(visible light and beyond).
Applications of Blackbody Radiation:
Astrophysics: Helps determine the temperature and properties of stars based on their emitted radiation.
Climate Science: Important in understanding Earth's energy balance and greenhouse effect.
Thermal Imaging: Used in thermal cameras to detect emitted infrared radiation.
Understanding blackbody radiation is crucial for various fields in science and engineering, forming the basis
for modern theories of quantum mechanics and thermodynamics. 46
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Thermodynamics
Thermodynamics:
Thermodynamics is the study of energy, heat, and work and how they interact in physical systems. It
provides fundamental principles that govern the behavior of matter and energy in various processes.
Key Concepts:
1. System and Surroundings:
System: The part of the universe being studied (e.g., a gas in a cylinder).
Surroundings: Everything outside the system that can interact with it.
2. Types of Systems:
Open System: Can exchange both energy and matter with its surroundings (e.g., a boiling pot).
Closed System: Can exchange energy but not matter (e.g., a sealed gas container).
Isolated System: Cannot exchange energy or matter with its surroundings (e.g., a thermos).
3. State Functions:
Properties that depend only on the current state of the system, not on how it got there (e.g.,
temperature, pressure, volume).
47
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Thermodynamics
Laws of Thermodynamics:
Zeroth Law:
Establishes the concept of temperature: If two systems are each in thermal equilibrium with a third system,
they are in thermal equilibrium with each other.
First Law (Law of Energy Conservation):
Energy cannot be created or destroyed, only transformed.
Δ𝑈 = 𝑄 − 𝑊
Where:
Δ𝑈 = change in internal energy.
𝑄 = heat added to the system.
𝑊 = work done by the system.
48
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Thermodynamics
Second Law:
The total entropy of an isolated system can never decrease; it either remains constant or increases. This
law implies that processes occur in the direction that increases the total entropy of the universe. For
reversible processes:
Δ𝑆 = 𝑄rev/𝑇
Where:
Δ𝑆 = change in entropy.
𝑄rev = heat transfer in a reversible process.
𝑇 = absolute temperature.
Third Law:
As the temperature approaches absolute zero, the entropy of a perfect crystal approaches zero, providing a
reference point for the determination of entropy.
49
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Thermodynamics
Thermodynamic Processes:
Isothermal Process:
Occurs at constant temperature.
Heat added equals work done: 𝑄 = 𝑊.
Adiabatic Process:
No heat exchange occurs (𝑄 =0).
Change in internal energy equals work done: Δ𝑈 = −𝑊.
Isobaric Process:
Occurs at constant pressure.
Work done is given by: 𝑊 = 𝑃Δ𝑉.
Isochoric Process:
Occurs at constant volume.
No work is done (𝑊=0), and all heat added changes internal energy: Δ𝑈=𝑄.
50
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Thermodynamics
Applications of Thermodynamics:
Heat Engines: Analyze how engines convert heat into work, determining efficiency.
Refrigeration: Study how refrigerators and heat pumps operate by moving heat from cold to hot areas.
Chemical Reactions: Assess changes in enthalpy and entropy during reactions, guiding reactions' feasibility.
Phase Changes: Examine energy changes involved in transitions between solid, liquid, and gas phases.
Thermodynamics is foundational in physics, chemistry, and engineering, influencing various applications in
daily life and technology. If you have specific topics within thermodynamics you'd like to explore further,
feel free to ask!
51
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Thermodynamic Equilibrium
Thermodynamic Equilibrium:
Thermodynamic equilibrium refers to a state in which all macroscopic properties of a system are uniform
and constant over time. In this state, there are no net flows of matter or energy within the system or
between the system and its surroundings. Thermodynamic equilibrium can be divided into several types:
Types of Equilibrium:
Thermal Equilibrium:
Occurs when two systems in thermal contact do not exchange heat, meaning they are at the same
temperature. According to the Zeroth Law of Thermodynamics, if system A is in thermal equilibrium with
system B, and system B is in thermal equilibrium with system C, then systems A and C are also in thermal
equilibrium.
Mechanical Equilibrium:
Exists when there are no net forces acting within a system, meaning the pressure is uniform and there are
no changes in volume or shape. In a closed system, this implies that the pressure is constant throughout
the system.
Chemical Equilibrium:
Achieved in a chemical reaction when the rate of the forward reaction equals the rate of the reverse
reaction. This results in constant concentrations of reactants and products over time. 52
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Thermodynamic Equilibrium
Conditions for Thermodynamic Equilibrium:
For a system to be in thermodynamic equilibrium, it must satisfy the following conditions:
Uniform Temperature: The temperature must be the same throughout the system.
Uniform Pressure: The pressure must be consistent across the entire system.
Uniform Composition: The chemical potential and concentration of species must be constant throughout
the system.
Importance of Thermodynamic Equilibrium:
Predictability: Systems in equilibrium can be analyzed and modeled with predictable outcomes. This
predictability is essential in designing thermodynamic processes, such as engines and refrigeration cycles.
Reference States: Equilibrium states serve as reference points for measuring changes in thermodynamic
properties.
Stability: Systems tend to move towards equilibrium, making this state a point of stability in physical
processes.
53
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Thermodynamic Equilibrium
Applications of Thermodynamic Equilibrium:
Heat Engines: In the analysis of heat engines, understanding equilibrium helps determine the efficiency
and performance of cycles like the Carnot cycle.
Reactions in Chemistry: Equilibrium concepts are critical in chemical reactions, including the use of Le
Chatelier's Principle to predict how changes in conditions will affect the position of equilibrium.
Biological Processes: Many biological processes, such as enzyme reactions, depend on achieving
equilibrium to function optimally.
Equilibrium Constants in Chemistry: In chemical equilibrium, the ratio of concentrations of products to
reactants is constant at a given temperature and is described by the equilibrium constant 𝐾:
𝐾 = [products]/[reactants]
The specific form of the equation depends on the balanced chemical reaction.
Understanding thermodynamic equilibrium is essential for analyzing and predicting the behavior of
physical and chemical systems. If you have any specific aspects of thermodynamic equilibrium you'd like to
explore further, let me know!
54
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Ideal Gas
•Ideal Gas:
An ideal gas is a theoretical gas composed of many randomly moving particles that interact only through
elastic collisions and are assumed to obey a set of simplifying assumptions. Ideal gas behavior is
described by the Ideal Gas Law, which relates pressure, volume, temperature, and the number of
particles in the gas.
Key Assumptions of the Ideal Gas Model:
1. Negligible Particle Volume: The individual gas molecules are considered to have negligible volume
compared to the volume of the container.
2. No Intermolecular Forces: Gas particles do not exert attractive or repulsive forces on each other,
meaning they only interact during elastic collisions.
3. Elastic Collisions: When gas particles collide with each other or the walls of the container, no kinetic
energy is lost.
4.Continuous, Random Motion: Gas particles are constantly moving in random directions, with a
distribution of speeds.
5. Obeys the Ideal Gas Law: The behavior of the gas follows the ideal gas law perfectly at all conditions.
55
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Ideal Gas
The Ideal Gas Law:
The Ideal Gas Law is an equation that relates the macroscopic properties of an ideal gas: pressure (𝑃),
volume (𝑉), temperature (𝑇), and the number of moles (𝑛) of the gas.
𝑃𝑉 = 𝑛𝑅𝑇
Where: P: Pressure of the gas (in units like Pascals, atm, or torr).
𝑉: Volume of the gas (in liters or cubic meters).
𝑛: Number of moles of gas.
𝑅: Ideal gas constant. Its value depends on the units used: 𝑅 = 8.314 J/molcdotpK (when 𝑃 is in
Pascals and 𝑉 is in cubic meters).
𝑅 = 0.0821 Lcdotpatm/molcdotpK (when 𝑃 is in atmospheres and 𝑉 is in liters).
𝑇: Temperature of the gas in Kelvin (K).
Derived Equations from the Ideal Gas Law:
Boyle’s Law (constant 𝑇 and 𝑛):
𝑃1𝑉1 = 𝑃2𝑉2
Pressure and volume are inversely proportional when temperature and the number of moles are constant.
56
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Ideal Gas
Charles’s Law (constant 𝑃 and 𝑛):
𝑉1/𝑇1= 𝑉2/𝑇2
Volume is directly proportional to temperature when pressure and the number of moles are constant.
Avogadro’s Law (constant 𝑇 and 𝑃):
𝑉1/𝑛1 = 𝑉2/𝑛2
Volume is directly proportional to the number of moles of gas at constant temperature and pressure
.
Gay-Lussac's Law (constant 𝑉 and 𝑛):
𝑃1/𝑇1=𝑃2/𝑇2
Pressure is directly proportional to temperature at constant volume.
57
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Ideal Gas
Applications of the Ideal Gas Law:
Determining Gas Properties: The Ideal Gas Law is often used to calculate one property (e.g., pressure,
volume, or temperature) if the others are known.
Kinetic Molecular Theory: The Ideal Gas Law is tied to the kinetic theory of gases, which describes gas
particles' behavior on a microscopic level.
Stoichiometry in Chemical Reactions: The Ideal Gas Law is useful in calculating the amounts of reactants or
products in reactions involving gases.
Gas Mixtures (Dalton’s Law): For a mixture of ideal gases, the total pressure is the sum of the partial
pressures of the individual gases:
𝑃total = 𝑃1 + 𝑃2 + 𝑃3 + …
Limitations of the Ideal Gas Model:
High Pressure and Low Temperature: At high pressures or low temperatures, real gases deviate from ideal
behavior because the assumptions of negligible volume and no intermolecular forces are no longer valid.
Real Gases: For real gases, corrections to the ideal gas law are made using the Van der Waals equation,
which accounts for the volume of particles and intermolecular forces.
Understanding the ideal gas law and its applications is fundamental in many areas of chemistry and physics,
particularly in understanding the behavior of gases in various environments.
58
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Energy Transfer
Energy Transfer:
Energy transfer refers to the movement of energy from one object or system to another, typically in the
form of heat, work, or radiation. Energy cannot be created or destroyed (according to the First Law of
Thermodynamics), so it is transferred between systems in different forms. Understanding how energy is
transferred is essential in fields such as thermodynamics, physics, and engineering.
Types of Energy Transfer:
1. Heat Transfer:
Heat is the transfer of energy due to a temperature difference between two objects or systems.
Heat can be transferred in three main ways: conduction, convection, and radiation.
a. Conduction:
The transfer of heat through direct contact between molecules. It occurs in solids, liquids, and gases, but it
is most efficient in solids, especially metals.
𝑄/t = 𝑘𝐴Δ𝑇/d
Where: 𝑄 = amount of heat transferred, 𝑘 = thermal conductivity of the material, 𝐴 = cross-sectional area.
Δ𝑇 = temperature difference, 𝑑 = thickness of the material, and 𝑡 = time.
59
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Energy Transfer
b. Convection:
Heat transfer through the movement of fluids (liquids or gases). When a fluid is heated, it becomes less
dense and rises, while cooler, denser fluid sinks, setting up a convection current.
𝑄/t = ℎ𝐴(𝑇surface − 𝑇fluid)
Where: ℎ = convective heat transfer coefficient,
𝑇surface and 𝑇fluid = temperatures of the surface and the surrounding fluid.
c. Radiation:
The transfer of heat via electromagnetic waves, such as infrared radiation. Unlike conduction and
convection, radiation can occur in a vacuum (e.g., the Sun heating the Earth).
𝑄/t = 𝜎𝜖𝐴𝑇4
Where: 𝜎 = Stefan-Boltzmann constant (5.67 × 10−8 W/m2⋅K4),
𝜖 = emissivity of the surface (ranges from 0 to 1),
𝐴 = surface area,
𝑇 = absolute temperature in Kelvin.
60
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Energy Transfer
2. Work:
Work is the transfer of energy when a force is applied to an object causing displacement. In
thermodynamics, work is often associated with gas expansion or compression.
𝑊 = 𝑃Δ𝑉
Where: 𝑊 = work done,
𝑃 = pressure,
Δ𝑉 = change in volume.
Mechanical Work:
Energy transferred by a force acting over a distance.
𝑊 = 𝐹⋅𝑑
Where: 𝐹 = force, 𝑑 = displacement in the direction of the force.
Electrical Work:
Work is done when an electrical current flows through a circuit.
𝑊 = 𝑉𝐼𝑡
Where: 𝑉 = voltage, 𝐼 = current, 𝑡 = time.
61
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Energy Transfer
Radiation:
Energy transfer by electromagnetic waves, such as light, infrared, or ultraviolet radiation. Radiation is
important in processes like solar heating and the emission of light from hot objects.
Applications of Energy Transfer:
Engines: In internal combustion engines, chemical energy from fuel is converted into thermal energy, which
is then transformed into mechanical work.
Refrigeration and Heat Pumps: Refrigerators and heat pumps transfer heat from a cooler area to a warmer
area using mechanical work.
Power Generation: Power plants transfer energy from burning fuel or nuclear reactions to steam, which is
then converted into electrical energy through turbines.
Heat Exchangers: Devices that transfer heat between two or more fluids without mixing them, commonly
used in air conditioners, refrigerators, and car radiators.
Summary:
Energy transfer plays a crucial role in all physical and chemical processes. It is fundamental to
understanding how systems evolve, how work is done, and how heat flows in various systems.
Understanding energy transfer mechanisms is essential for applications in thermodynamics, engineering,
and everyday technology. 62
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Spectroscopy and Atomic Physics
Spectroscopy and Atomic Physics:
Spectroscopy and atomic physics are closely intertwined, with spectroscopy serving as one of the primary
methods to study the properties and behaviors of atoms and molecules. Spectroscopy provides crucial
insights into atomic structures, energy levels, and the interactions between light and matter.
Spectroscopy: The Study of Light and Matter
Spectroscopy is the study of how light interacts with matter, specifically how atoms and molecules absorb,
emit, or scatter electromagnetic radiation. It allows scientists to determine the energy levels of electrons in
atoms and molecules, providing a detailed understanding of atomic and molecular structures.
Types of Spectroscopy:
1. Absorption Spectroscopy:
Atoms or molecules absorb specific wavelengths of light, which causes electrons to jump from lower
energy levels to higher energy levels. This results in dark lines (absorption lines) in a continuous
spectrum.
2. Emission Spectroscopy:
When atoms or molecules return to a lower energy state, they emit light at specific wavelengths. This
emitted light creates a series of bright lines (emission lines) against a dark background.
63
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Spectroscopy and Atomic Physics
3. Fluorescence and Phosphorescence:
In fluorescence, atoms absorb light and then quickly re-emit it at longer wavelengths. Phosphorescence is
similar, but the re-emission of light is delayed.
4. Raman Spectroscopy:
Raman spectroscopy examines the inelastic scattering of light, which provides information about the
vibrational and rotational energy levels of molecules.
Atomic Physics: The Study of Atoms
Atomic physics focuses on the structure of atoms, primarily the behavior of electrons in orbit around the
nucleus. It also explores the interaction between atoms and electromagnetic radiation, which is the
foundation of many spectroscopic techniques.
Key Concepts in Atomic Physics:
1. Energy Levels:
Electrons in atoms are confined to discrete energy levels. When an electron absorbs energy, it jumps to a
higher energy level (excitation). When it returns to a lower level, it emits energy in the form of light
(photon emission).
𝐸 = ℎ𝜈
E: Energy of the photon, ℎ: Planck's constant (6.626 × 10−34 Jcdotps) and 𝜈: Frequency of the radiation.
64
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Spectroscopy and Atomic Physics
2. Spectral Lines:
Every element has a unique set of spectral lines, known as its atomic fingerprint. These lines arise from the
transitions of electrons between energy levels within the atom. For example, hydrogen has well-known emission
lines such as the Balmer series (in the visible range) and the Lyman series (in the ultraviolet range).
3. Quantum Transitions:
Quantum mechanics governs the behavior of electrons in atoms, explaining why energy levels are quantized and how
transitions between these levels produce distinct spectral lines.
Spectral Series in Hydrogen
The hydrogen atom provides a simple and well-studied system for understanding atomic spectra. Its electron
transitions produce several series of spectral lines:
Lyman Series:
Ultraviolet emissions caused by electron transitions to the ground state (n = 1).
1/𝜆 = 𝑅𝐻(1 − 1/𝑛2), 𝑛 > 1
Balmer Series:
Visible light emissions due to transitions to the second energy level (n = 2).
1/𝜆 = 𝑅𝐻(1/22 − 1/𝑛2), 𝑛 > 2
Where 𝑅𝐻 is the Rydberg constant (1.097 × 107 m−1)(1.097×10 7 m −1 ).
65
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Spectroscopy and Atomic Physics
Paschen Series:
Infrared emissions due to transitions to the third energy level (n = 3).
Applications of Spectroscopy in Atomic Physics:
1. Elemental Analysis:
Spectroscopy is used to identify elements in samples by comparing observed spectral lines to known
atomic spectra. This method is used in astrophysics to determine the composition of stars and galaxies
by analyzing the light they emit or absorb.
2. Determining Atomic Structure: Spectroscopy reveals the energy levels of electrons within an atom,
providing insight into the atom's internal structure and the interactions of its electrons with external
fields.
3. Studying Quantum Transitions: Atomic physics and spectroscopy are central to understanding quantum
transitions, which are changes in an atom's energy state due to the absorption or emission of photons.
This underpins technologies like lasers and atomic clocks.
4. Astronomical Spectroscopy: In astronomy, spectroscopy is vital for studying distant celestial objects.
The Doppler shift of spectral lines is used to determine the movement of stars and galaxies, providing
evidence for the expansion of the universe.
5. Medical Imaging: Techniques like MRI (Magnetic Resonance Imaging) rely on principles of atomic
physics and spectroscopy to produce detailed images of the human body. 66
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Spectroscopy and Atomic Physics
Quantum Mechanics and Spectroscopy
In atomic physics, quantum mechanics explains why only certain wavelengths of light are absorbed or
emitted by an atom. The Schrödinger equation provides the framework to calculate the allowed energy
levels of electrons in atoms.
Wave functions describe the probability of finding an electron in a particular location around the nucleus.
The quantized energy levels and the transitions between them give rise to the atomic spectra observed in
spectroscopy.
Summary:
Spectroscopy and atomic physics provide deep insights into the nature of atoms and their interactions with
light. Through the study of spectral lines and atomic transitions, scientists can uncover information about
the structure of atoms, their energy levels, and their behaviors in various environments. Spectroscopy
remains one of the most powerful tools in both atomic physics and broader scientific fields like chemistry,
astronomy, and materials science.
67
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Scattering in Physics
Scattering in Physics:
Scattering occurs when particles or waves (such as light, sound, or electromagnetic radiation) deviate from
their original path due to interaction with other particles or structures.
Types of Scattering:
1. Rayleigh Scattering:
This is the scattering of light by particles much smaller than the wavelength of the light. It's responsible for
the blue color of the sky. Shorter wavelengths (blue) are scattered more efficiently than longer
wavelengths (red), making the sky appear blue.
𝐼 ∝ 1/𝜆4
Where: 𝐼 is Intensity of scattered light, 𝜆 is Wavelength of the light.
2. Mie Scattering:
Scattering by particles that are comparable in size to the wavelength of light, like water droplets in clouds.
It does not have a strong wavelength dependence, so it results in white light, explaining why clouds appear
white.
3. Thomson Scattering:
This is the elastic scattering of electromagnetic radiation by free electrons.
It's a simpler case of scattering that assumes the electron is not bound to an atom. 68
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Scattering in Physics
4. Compton Scattering:
In this form of scattering, high-energy photons (such as X-rays) collide with electrons, resulting in a
decrease in energy (increase in wavelength) of the photons.
The energy shift is given by:
Δ𝜆 = (ℎ/𝑚𝑒𝑐)(1 − cos𝜃)
h: Planck’s constant, 𝑚𝑒 : Electron mass, 𝑐: Speed of light and, 𝜃: Scattering angle.
5. Raman Scattering:
Raman scattering occurs when light interacts with molecular vibrations or rotations, resulting in a change
in the light's energy (or wavelength).
This inelastic scattering leads to shifts in the frequency of scattered light, which provides insights into the
vibrational modes of molecules.
Applications of Scattering:
1. Atmospheric Physics:
Rayleigh and Mie scattering explain many phenomena in the atmosphere, such as the color of the sky,
sunsets, and the appearance of clouds.
69
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Scattering in Physics
2. Medical Imaging:
Techniques like X-ray and CT scans rely on the principles of scattering to produce images of the body's
interior.
3. Astronomy:
Scattering plays a role in the analysis of light from stars and other celestial objects, giving clues about
the composition of interstellar dust and gases.
4. Material Science:
Scattering techniques (e.g., neutron scattering, X-ray diffraction) are widely used to study the structure
of materials at the atomic or molecular level.
70
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Spectra of Celestial Objects
• Spectra of Celestial Objects
The spectrum of a celestial object is essentially a breakdown of the light emitted, absorbed, or reflected
by the object. By studying the spectrum, scientists can gather important information about the physical
properties of the object, such as its temperature, composition, motion, and more.
Types of Spectra:
There are three primary types of spectra that celestial objects can exhibit:
1.Continuous Spectrum:
Produced by a hot, dense object such as a star or a solid body.
A continuous spectrum shows all colors (wavelengths) without any interruptions.
Example: The Sun emits a continuous spectrum due to its hot, dense core.
2. Emission Spectrum:
Created when hot gas emits light at specific wavelengths.
The spectrum shows bright emission lines at characteristic wavelengths, each corresponding to a
different element.
Example: Nebulae, composed of hot gases, often emit an emission spectrum revealing the elements like
hydrogen and helium. 71
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Spectra of Celestial Objects
3. Absorption Spectrum:
Produced when a cooler gas lies in front of a hotter source of continuous light. The gas absorbs specific
wavelengths of light, leaving dark absorption lines in the spectrum.
The Sun's spectrum is an absorption spectrum because cooler gas in the outer layers absorbs certain
wavelengths from the inner hotter regions.
How Spectroscopy Reveals Information about Celestial Objects
1.Chemical Composition:
The absorption or emission lines in the spectrum of a celestial object correspond to specific elements or
molecules. By comparing these lines to laboratory spectra, astronomers can determine which elements
are present in stars, galaxies, and other objects.
For example, the hydrogen Balmer series reveals the presence of hydrogen in many stars.
72
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Spectra of Celestial Objects
2. Temperature:
The overall shape of the spectrum, particularly the peak wavelength, can indicate the temperature of
the object. According to Wien’s Law:
𝜆max = 𝑏𝑇
Where 𝜆max is the wavelength at which the object emits the most light,
𝑏 is Wien’s constant (2.898×10−3 mcdotpK)(2.898×10 −3 mcdotpK), and 𝑇 is the temperature in
Kelvin.
3. Velocity (Doppler Shift):
By measuring the shift in the position of spectral lines, astronomers can determine whether an object is
moving toward or away from us. This is known as the Doppler effect.
Blueshift: If the lines are shifted toward shorter wavelengths, the object is moving toward us.
Redshift: If the lines are shifted toward longer wavelengths, the object is moving away from us.
4. Mass and Gravity:
The broadening of spectral lines can provide information about the mass or gravity of a celestial object.
More massive stars or stars with higher gravity will show broader lines due to stronger gravitational
effects on light.
73
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Spectra of Celestial Objects
5. Rotation:
If an object is rotating, one side of the object will be moving toward us while the other side moves
away. This causes a broadening or splitting of spectral lines due to the Doppler effect.
Examples of Spectra in Celestial Objects:
1. Stars:
Stars emit a continuous spectrum due to the dense, hot gases in their cores. Their outer layers produce
absorption lines, which allow astronomers to determine the star’s composition, temperature, and
movement.
The OBAFGKM classification system for stars is based on their temperature, with O-type stars being the
hottest (blue) and M-type stars the coolest (red).
2. Galaxies:
Spectra of galaxies often show absorption lines from stars, but also emission lines from ionized gas in
star-forming regions. The redshift of galaxy spectra provides evidence for the expanding universe and
can be used to measure the distance to galaxies (Hubble’s Law).
3. Quasars:
Quasars are distant, extremely bright objects powered by supermassive black holes. Their spectra show
very strong emission lines, and their redshifts are used to determine their distance from Earth. 74
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Spectra of Celestial Objects
4. Planets:
The spectra of planets and moons primarily reveal the composition of their atmospheres. For example,
Earth’s atmosphere shows absorption bands of oxygen, water vapor, and carbon dioxide.
Applications in Astronomy:
Determining the Age of Stars: By studying the spectrum of a star cluster, astronomers can estimate the
ages of the stars within it.
Exoplanet Detection: The light from a star dims slightly as an exoplanet passes in front of it (transit
method), and the planet's atmosphere can leave its spectral signature.
Cosmology: The redshift of distant galaxies provides evidence for the expansion of the universe and
supports the Big Bang theory.
75
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Doppler Effect
• Doppler Effect:
The Doppler Effect describes the change in frequency or wavelength of a wave due to the relative motion
between the source of the wave and the observer. It is commonly observed with sound waves but also applies
to electromagnetic waves, such as light. When dealing with very high speeds, especially near the speed of
light, the relativistic Doppler Effect comes into play, which requires corrections based on Einstein’s theory of
relativity.
Classical Doppler Effect
1.For Sound Waves:
The classical Doppler Effect formula (for sound waves in a stationary medium) depends on whether the
observer and the source are moving toward or away from each other.
General Formula:
For an observer and a source both moving relative to the medium (e.g., air for sound waves):
𝑓′ = 𝑓((𝑣 + 𝑣𝑜)/(𝑣 − 𝑣𝑠))
Where: 𝑓′ = observed frequency, 𝑓 = emitted frequency (source), 𝑣 = speed of sound in the medium,
𝑣𝑜 = velocity of the observer relative to the medium (positive when moving toward the source),
𝑣𝑠 = velocity of the source relative to the medium (positive when moving toward the observer).
When the observer moves toward the source, the frequency increases; when they move away, the frequency
decreases. Likewise, the movement of the source affects the observed frequency similarly. 76
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Doppler Effect
2. For Electromagnetic Waves (Non-relativistic Approximation):
For light and other electromagnetic waves at low speeds (much slower than the speed of light), the Doppler shift
can be approximated by:
𝑓′ = 𝑓(1 + 𝑣𝑟/𝑐)
Where: 𝑣𝑟 is the radial velocity (positive if moving toward the observer), 𝑐 is the speed of light.
Relativistic Doppler Effect:
When dealing with high velocities, especially velocities close to the speed of light, the relativistic Doppler Effect
comes into play. This takes into account time dilation, as predicted by Einstein’s theory of relativity.
1.Relativistic Doppler Shift:
For light waves or other electromagnetic waves, the relativistic Doppler Effect is given by:
𝑓′=𝑓[(1 + 𝑣/𝑐)/(1 − 𝑣/𝑐)]
Where: 𝑓′ = observed frequency, 𝑓= emitted frequency (source), 𝑣 = relative velocity between the source and the
observer (positive if moving toward the observer, negative if moving away), 𝑐 = speed of light.
2. Redshift and Blueshift:
Blueshift occurs when the source is moving toward the observer, resulting in an increase in observed frequency.
Redshift occurs when the source is moving away from the observer, causing a decrease in observed frequency.
The relativistic equation also accounts for the fact that at high velocities, time dilation affects the rate at which
waves are emitted and observed. 77
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Doppler Effect
• Derivation (Relativistic Case):
The relativistic Doppler shift formula arises from combining two key relativistic concepts:
1. Lorentz Transformation:
The relationship between time intervals in different frames of reference moving relative to each other.
Time Dilation: A moving clock ticks more slowly compared to a stationary observer.
By considering the light emitted from the source in the frame of reference of both the observer and the
source, we derive the relativistic Doppler shift. The result accounts for both the relative motion and the fact
that time is dilated for the moving source.
• Summary of Key Equations:
Classical Doppler Effect for sound waves:
𝑓′ = 𝑓((𝑣 + 𝑣𝑜)/(𝑣 − 𝑣𝑠))
Relativistic Doppler Effect for electromagnetic waves:
𝑓′=𝑓[(1 + 𝑣/𝑐)/(1 − 𝑣/𝑐)]
Both the classical and relativistic Doppler shifts are vital in many areas of physics, from understanding sound
wave propagation to analyzing the movement of stars and galaxies through their light shifts.
78
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Nuclear Physics
• Nuclear Physics:
Nuclear Physics is a field focused on understanding the atomic nucleus, its interactions, structure, and
behavior. To model and describe nuclear systems, nuclear physicists use several theories and equations that
explain nuclear forces, energy, and decay processes. Here’s a detailed look at nuclear physics, including the
models and mathematical formulations used to describe nuclear phenomena.
1. Models of the Nucleus:
1.1. Liquid Drop Model:
The liquid drop model, introduced by George Gamow and later refined by Niels Bohr and others, treats the
nucleus like a drop of incompressible fluid. This model explains nuclear binding energy and nuclear fission
by assuming the nucleons behave similarly to molecules in a liquid drop. The forces acting between
nucleons are analogous to surface tension and cohesion in a liquid.
Binding Energy Formula (Semi-Empirical Mass Formula): The binding energy of a nucleus, which holds the
protons and neutrons together, is approximated by the Bethe-Weizsäcker formula, also known as the semi-
empirical mass formula (SEMF):
𝐵(𝑍,𝐴) = 𝑎𝑣𝐴 − 𝑎𝑠𝐴2/3 − 𝑎𝑐𝑍(𝑍 − 1)/𝐴1/3 − 𝑎𝑎(𝐴 − 2𝑍)2/𝐴 + 𝛿(𝐴,𝑍)
Where: 𝐴 = mass number (total number of nucleons),
𝑍 = atomic number (number of protons),
𝑎𝑣 , 𝑎𝑠 , 𝑎𝑐 , and 𝑎𝑎 are constants that account for different nuclear effects: 79
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Nuclear Physics
𝑎𝑣 : Volume term (nucleon-nucleon attraction),
𝑎𝑠 : Surface term (surface nucleons have fewer neighbors, reducing binding),
𝑎𝑐 : Coulomb term (electrostatic repulsion between protons),
𝑎𝑎 : Asymmetry term (accounts for the energy cost of imbalance between protons and neutrons),
𝛿(𝐴,𝑍): Pairing term (a correction for nuclei with even numbers of protons and neutrons, making them
more stable).
1.2. Shell Model:
The shell model of the nucleus is analogous to the electron shell model in atomic physics. It explains the
arrangement of protons and neutrons in discrete energy levels or "shells" within the nucleus. Each
nucleon occupies a quantum state, and the energy levels are filled according to the Pauli Exclusion
Principle (no two identical fermions can occupy the same quantum state).
Key Concepts:
Nucleons occupy discrete energy levels in potential wells.
"Magic numbers" (2, 8, 20, 28, 50, 82, 126) correspond to fully filled shells, leading to particularly stable
nuclei.
80
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Nuclear Physics
Schrödinger Equation for Shell Model:
The potential inside the nucleus is often modeled as a harmonic oscillator or a Woods-Saxon potential,
but an exact equation for the energy levels is complex and relies on quantum mechanics.
The Schrödinger equation in spherical coordinates for a nucleon moving in a potential 𝑉(𝑟)V(r) inside the
nucleus is:
(−ℏ2/2𝑚)∇2 + 𝑉(𝑟))𝜓(𝑟) = 𝐸𝜓(𝑟)
Where: 𝜓(𝑟)) is the wave function of the nucleon,
𝐸 is the energy of the nucleon,
𝑉(𝑟) is the nuclear potential (often taken as a harmonic oscillator potential for simplification).
1.3. Collective Model:
The collective model combines features of the liquid drop model and the shell model. It treats the
nucleus as having both individual nucleon motion (like in the shell model) and collective behaviors (like
vibrations and rotations, akin to the liquid drop model).
Rotational States: For non-spherical nuclei, the energy of rotational states is quantized. The rotational
energy levels for a nucleus can be described by:
𝐸 = (ℏ2/2𝐼).𝐽(𝐽 + 1)
Where: 𝐼 is the moment of inertia of the nucleus, 𝐽 is the total angular momentum quantum number.
81
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Nuclear Physics
Vibrational States: The nucleus can also undergo vibrations, particularly in quadrupole (elongated) modes.
The energy for vibrational states is quantized in a manner similar to the harmonic oscillator:
𝐸𝑛 = ℏ𝜔(𝑛 + 1/2)
2. Nuclear Reactions and Decay:
2.1. Nuclear Reactions:
Nuclear reactions involve changes to the nucleus when it interacts with another particle or nucleus. Two
common types of nuclear reactions are fission and fusion.
Fusion: The process where two light nuclei combine to form a heavier nucleus, releasing energy. The
most important fusion reaction in stars is the fusion of hydrogen to form helium:
4(1,1)H → (4,2)He + 2𝑒+ + 2𝜈𝑒 + energy
[ N.B: (A, Z)  (Atomic mass, Atomic Number) ]
Fission: A heavy nucleus splits into two smaller nuclei, along with additional neutrons and energy. An
example of fission in uranium-235 is:
(235,92)U + 𝑛→ (141,56)Ba + (92,36)Kr + 3𝑛 + energy
82
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Nuclear Physics
2.2. Radioactive Decay:
Alpha Decay: Emission of an alpha particle (two protons and two neutrons):
(238,92) U → (234, 90) Th + (4,2)He
Beta Decay: A neutron converts into a proton, and an electron (beta particle) and an antineutrino are
emitted:
𝑛 → 𝑝 + 𝑒− + 𝜈ˉ𝑒
Gamma Decay: An excited nucleus releases energy in the form of gamma rays:
(60,27)Co∗ → (60,27)Co + 𝛾
2.3. Decay Rates and Half-Life:
The decay rate of a radioactive substance is characterized by its half-life (𝑡1/2), the time it takes for half of
the radioactive nuclei to decay. The relationship between the number of undecayed nuclei 𝑁(𝑡) at time 𝑡
and the initial number 𝑁0 is given by:
𝑁(𝑡) = 𝑁0𝑒−𝜆𝑡
Where, 𝜆 is the decay constant, and 𝑡1/2 is related to 𝜆 by:
𝑡1/2 = ln(2)/𝜆
83
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Nuclear Physics
3. Equations in Nuclear Physics:
3.1. Mass-Energy Equivalence (Einstein’s Equation):
One of the fundamental equations in nuclear physics is Einstein’s mass-energy equivalence:
𝐸 = 𝑚𝑐2
Where: 𝐸 is the energy, 𝑚 is the mass defect (difference between the mass of the nucleus and the
sum of the masses of its constituent nucleons), 𝑐 is the speed of light.
This equation explains how nuclear reactions release enormous amounts of energy due to the small mass
differences involved.
3.2. Binding Energy per Nucleon: The binding energy per nucleon is a key indicator of the stability of a nucleus:
𝐵/𝐴 = 𝐸binding/𝐴
Where: 𝐵/𝐴 is the binding energy per nucleon, 𝐸binding is the total binding energy, 𝐴 is the mass number.
• Conclusion:
Nuclear physics involves complex interactions between the fundamental forces governing atomic nuclei.
Through models like the liquid drop, shell, and collective models, as well as equations describing nuclear
reactions and decay, we gain insights into how nuclei behave, decay, and produce energy. This understanding
has led to critical applications such as nuclear energy, medical diagnostics, and even astrophysics.
84
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Atomic Physics
Atomic Physics:
Atomic Physics is the study of atoms, focusing on the behavior of electrons, the structure of the atom,
and the interactions between atoms and electromagnetic radiation. The fundamental aspects of atomic
physics involve the quantization of energy levels, electron transitions, and the emission or absorption of
photons. Below is a detailed description of atomic physics with relevant equations and a figure that
visually represents the atomic structure and behavior of electrons.
Basic Concepts in Atomic Physics:
1.1. The Atom:
An atom consists of a nucleus, which contains protons and neutrons, and electrons that move around the
nucleus in quantized energy levels or shells.
1.2. Energy Levels of Electrons:
Electrons in an atom occupy specific energy levels. When an electron transitions between energy levels,
it either absorbs or emits a photon of energy corresponding to the difference between those levels.
The Bohr Model for hydrogen gives a simple description of these energy levels.
Energy of Electrons in the Bohr Model:
𝐸𝑛 = −13.6 eV/𝑛2. 85
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Atomic Physics
Where: 𝐸𝑛 is the energy of an electron in the 𝑛-th energy level,
𝑛 is the principal quantum number (1, 2, 3, ...).
13.6 eV is the energy of the electron in the ground state of hydrogen.
Radius of Electron Orbits:
𝑟𝑛 = 𝑛2⋅𝑟1
Where, 𝑟𝑛 is the radius of the electron orbit in the 𝑛-th level and 𝑟1 is the Bohr radius, approximately 0.529 × 10−10
meters.
2. Quantum Mechanics of the Atom: In atomic physics, the behavior of electrons is described by quantum mechanics,
specifically the Schrödinger equation:
𝐻^𝜓 = 𝐸𝜓H^
Where: 𝐻^ is the Hamiltonian operator, which represents the total energy of the system (kinetic +
potential energy),
𝜓 is the wave function of the electron, which gives the probability distribution of the electron's
position,
𝐸 is the energy eigenvalue associated with the wave function.
For the hydrogen atom, the potential energy of the electron is determined by the Coulomb force between the
electron and the nucleus. The Schrödinger equation leads to the quantization of energy levels, which correspond to
the orbits in the Bohr model. 86
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Atomic Physics
Electron Transitions and Photons:
When an electron moves from a higher energy level (𝑛2) to a lower energy level (𝑛1), a photon is emitted, and
the energy of the photon is given by the difference in energy between the two levels:
𝐸photon = 𝐸𝑛2 − 𝐸𝑛1
The energy of the photon can also be related to its wavelength (𝜆) using the equation:
𝐸photon = ℎ𝑐/𝜆
Where: ℎ is Planck's constant (6.626 × 10−34 Js),
𝑐 is the speed of light (3.00 × 108 m/s),
𝜆 is the wavelength of the emitted or absorbed photon.
3. Atomic Spectra and the Rydberg Formula:
The emission or absorption of photons by electrons transitioning between energy levels produces discrete
spectral lines, which are characteristic of each element. The wavelength of these spectral lines is described by
the Rydberg formula for hydrogen-like atoms:
1/𝜆 = 𝑅𝐻(1/𝑛1
2 − 1/𝑛1
2)
Where: 𝜆 is the wavelength of the emitted/absorbed photon,
𝑅𝐻 is the Rydberg constant (1.097 × 107 m−1),
𝑛1 and 𝑛2 are the principal quantum numbers of the lower and higher energy levels, respectively.
87
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Atomic Physics
4. Atomic Orbitals and Quantum Numbers:
In modern atomic theory, electrons are described by atomic orbitals, which are probability distributions that describe
where an electron is likely to be found. The shape and orientation of these orbitals are described by quantum
numbers:
Principal Quantum Number (𝑛): Describes the size and energy of the orbital.
Azimuthal Quantum Number (𝑙): Describes the shape of the orbital (s, p, d, f).
Magnetic Quantum Number (𝑚𝑙): Describes the orientation of the orbital in space.
Spin Quantum Number (𝑚𝑠): Describes the spin of the electron.
5. Diagram of Atomic Physics:
It will be now generated a figure that visually represents
the atom with energy levels, electron transitions, and
the emission of photons, highlighting the concepts
discussed above.
The diagram above illustrates key atomic physics concepts, including the nucleus (protons and neutrons), electron
energy levels, and electron transitions. Arrows show the movement of electrons between energy levels, accompanied
by the emission or absorption of photons. The Bohr model is represented with circular orbits for quantized electron
energy states. This visual complements the mathematical equations and principles of atomic physics discussed earlier.
88
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Sphere
•Celestial sphere:
1.Introduction:
The celestial sphere is a pivotal concept in astronomy that allows us
to visualize and understand the positions and movements of
celestial bodies. By imagining the sky as a vast, spherical surface
surrounding the Earth, astronomers can simplify complex spatial
relationships and make accurate predictions about celestial events.
This document delves into the celestial sphere's definition,
structure, equations, and applications, providing a comprehensive
understanding of its importance in the field of astronomy.
2. Definition and Structure of the Celestial Sphere
2.1 What is the Celestial Sphere?
The celestial sphere is an abstract model representing the universe
surrounding Earth. It is an imaginary sphere with an infinitely large
radius centered on the Earth. All celestial objects, such as stars,
planets, and constellations, can be visualized as being projected
onto this sphere. The celestial sphere provides a simplified
framework for understanding the positions of celestial objects
relative to an observer on Earth. 89
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Sphere
2.2 Key Components of the Celestial Sphere
The celestial sphere is composed of various components that define its structure:
Celestial Equator: The projection of Earth’s equator onto the celestial sphere. It divides the sphere into
the northern and southern celestial hemispheres.
Celestial Poles: The points where the Earth’s axis of rotation intersects the celestial sphere. The North
Celestial Pole (NCP) is directly above the North Pole of the Earth, and the South Celestial Pole (SCP) is
directly above the South Pole.
Ecliptic Plane: The apparent path of the Sun across the celestial sphere throughout the year. The ecliptic
plane is tilted at approximately 23.5° relative to the celestial equator due to the axial tilt of the Earth.
Horizon: The boundary between the visible sky and the part of the celestial sphere that is obscured by
the Earth. The observer’s local horizon is a circle that divides the celestial sphere into the visible celestial
hemisphere and the hidden hemisphere.
2.2.1 Diagram of the Celestial Sphere
The celestial sphere is a pivotal concept in astronomy that allows us to visualize and understand the
positions and movements of celestial bodies. By imagining the sky as a vast, spherical surface surrounding
the Earth, astronomers can simplify complex spatial relationships and make accurate predictions about
celestial events. This document delves into the celestial sphere's definition, structure, equations, and
applications, providing a comprehensive understanding of its importance in the field of astronomy. 90
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Sphere
2.3 Understanding the Celestial Sphere:
The celestial sphere can be visualized as a dome over an observer's head. While the stars are fixed to
the celestial sphere, they appear to move across the sky due to Earth's rotation and revolution
around the Sun. The celestial sphere provides a framework for tracking these movements and
understanding celestial phenomena.
2.3.1 The Rotation of the Celestial Sphere:
The celestial sphere appears to rotate around the North and South Celestial Poles. This rotation is
due to Earth's own rotation on its axis, which takes approximately 24 hours to complete. As a result,
celestial objects appear to rise in the east, move across the sky, and set in the west.
2.3.2 The Motion of Celestial Objects:
The motion of celestial objects can be described in terms of their position on the celestial sphere.
Stars have fixed positions relative to one another, while planets, the Moon, and the Sun move
against the backdrop of fixed stars. This movement is crucial for understanding celestial mechanics
and predicting the positions of celestial objects.
91
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Sphere
3. Celestial Coordinates:
Celestial coordinates are used to specify the positions of objects on the celestial sphere, similar to
how latitude and longitude are used on Earth. The two primary systems of celestial coordinates are:
3.1 Equatorial Coordinate System:
The equatorial coordinate system is the most commonly used system for locating objects in the sky.
It consists of two main components:
Right Ascension (RA): Equivalent to longitude, right ascension measures the angular distance of an
object eastward along the celestial equator. It is measured in hours, minutes, and seconds. One hour
of right ascension corresponds to 15° of angular distance.
RA = ℎ/24 × 360∘
Where: ℎ is the hour angle in hours.
Declination (Dec): Equivalent to latitude, declination measures the angular distance of an object
north or south of the celestial equator. It is measured in degrees, with positive values indicating
north and negative values indicating south.
Dec = 𝜙
Where 𝜙 is the angle from the celestial equator.
92
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Sphere
3.2 Horizontal Coordinate System:
The horizontal coordinate system is based on the observer's local horizon and includes two components:
Altitude (Alt): The angle between the object and the observer’s horizon. Altitude is measured in degrees, with 0° at
the horizon and 90° at the zenith (directly overhead).
Azimuth (Az): The angle measured along the horizon, usually starting from true north and measured clockwise. It is
also measured in degrees, ranging from 0° to 360°.
3.3 Converting Between Coordinate Systems:
To locate celestial objects accurately, it is often necessary to convert between different coordinate systems. The
transformation equations between the equatorial and horizontal coordinate systems are as follows:
From Equatorial to Horizontal Coordinates
Given the observer's latitude 𝜙ϕ and the right ascension 𝛼α and declination 𝛿δ of the object, the altitude ℎh and
azimuth 𝐴A can be calculated using the following equations:
ℎ = arcsin(sin(𝜙)sin(𝛿) + cos(𝜙)cos(𝛿)cos(𝛼))
𝐴 = arctan(sin(𝛼)/(cos(𝛼)sin(𝜙) − tan(𝛿)cos(𝜙))
From Horizontal to Equatorial Coordinates
To convert from horizontal to equatorial coordinates, the following equations can be used:
𝛿 = arcsin(sin(ℎ)sin(𝜙) + cos(ℎ)cos(𝜙)cos(𝐴))
𝛼 = arctan(sin(𝐴)/(cos(𝐴)sin(𝜙) − tan(𝛿)cos(𝜙)))
These transformations are crucial for astronomers and navigators to accurately locate celestial objects from different
perspectives. 93
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Sphere
4. Spherical Trigonometry and the Celestial Sphere:
Spherical trigonometry is the branch of mathematics that deals with the relationships between angles and
distances on the surface of a sphere. It is particularly useful for calculating distances and angles on the celestial
sphere.
4.1 Basic Spherical Triangle:
A spherical triangle is formed by the arcs of great circles on the surface of a sphere. Each triangle has three sides
and three angles, denoted as 𝑎 ,𝑏, 𝑐 for the sides and 𝐴, 𝐵, 𝐶 for the angles opposite those sides. In the context of
the celestial sphere, these triangles can represent the angular separations between celestial objects.
4.1.1 Spherical Triangle Representation:
The figure above illustrates a spherical triangle on the surface of a sphere, with vertices representing celestial
objects and sides representing angular distances.
4.2 Law of Sines for Spherical Triangles:
The law of sines for spherical triangles states:
sin(𝑎)/sin(𝐴) = sin(𝑏)/sin(𝐵) = sin(𝑐)/sin(𝐶)
Where: 𝑎,𝑏,𝑐, are the lengths of the sides of the triangle on the sphere.
𝐴,𝐵,𝐶 are the angles opposite to those sides.
This law is essential for calculating the distances between celestial objects and their angles. For example, if an
astronomer knows two sides of a spherical triangle formed by three stars, they can use the law of sines to find the
third side or the angles. 94
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Sphere
4.3 Law of Cosines for Spherical Triangles:
The law of cosines for spherical triangles can be expressed as:
cos(𝑎) = cos(𝑏)cos(𝑐) + sin(𝑏)sin(𝑐)cos(𝐴)
Where 𝐴 is the angle opposite side 𝑎.
This law is useful for calculating unknown angles or sides in a spherical triangle, allowing astronomers to make
precise measurements and predictions.
5. Applications of the Celestial Sphere:
The celestial sphere model has numerous applications in astronomy and related fields. Some of the primary
applications include:
5.1 Navigation:
Navigators have historically relied on the celestial sphere for celestial navigation. By observing the positions of
stars and other celestial objects, sailors can determine their latitude and longitude at sea. For example, by
measuring the altitude of Polaris (the North Star), navigators can find their latitude in the Northern
Hemisphere.
5.2 Astrophotography:
Astrophotographers use the celestial sphere to plan their observations and capture images of celestial events.
By understanding the positions of celestial objects, they can optimize their shooting angles and times to achieve
the best results. 95
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Sphere
5.3 Star Mapping and Cataloging:
Astronomers use the celestial sphere to create star maps and catalogs of celestial objects. These
maps provide valuable information about the positions, brightness, and distances of stars, aiding in
research and exploration. Various star catalogs, such as the Hipparcos catalog, utilize the celestial
sphere framework to provide detailed information about thousands of stars.
5.4 Understanding Celestial Mechanics:
The celestial sphere model is crucial for understanding celestial mechanics and the motions of
planets, stars, and other celestial objects. It provides a framework for modeling the orbits of celestial
bodies and predicting their positions in the sky. For instance, Kepler's laws of planetary motion can
be applied to the celestial sphere to understand the orbits of planets around the Sun.
5.5 Astronomy Education:
The celestial sphere is also an important educational tool in astronomy. It helps students and
enthusiasts visualize the relationships between celestial objects, their movements, and the
geometry of the sky. Many planetarium software programs use the celestial sphere model to
simulate the night sky and provide interactive learning experiences.
96
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Sphere
6. Additional Considerations:
6.1 Precession of the Equinoxes:
One important factor affecting the celestial sphere is the precession of the equinoxes. This
phenomenon refers to the gradual shift of the celestial poles and the equinoxes due to gravitational
interactions with the Moon and the Sun. The precession causes the coordinates of celestial objects to
change over long periods, affecting their positions in the sky.
6.1.1 Causes of Precession:
The precession of the equinoxes is caused by the gravitational pull of the Sun and the Moon on
Earth's equatorial bulge. This pull creates a torque that causes the Earth's axis to wobble slowly over
time. The precession cycle takes approximately 26,000 years to complete, leading to a gradual shift in
the positions of celestial objects.
6.2 Nutation:
Nutation is another small oscillation in the orientation of the Earth’s axis that affects the celestial
sphere. It occurs due to gravitational interactions with the Moon and causes periodic changes in the
positions of celestial objects. The nutation cycle has a period of about 18.6 years and results in small
variations in the coordinates of celestial objects. 97
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Sphere
6.3 Aberration of Starlight:
The motion of Earth around the Sun causes a phenomenon known as the aberration of starlight,
which results in a slight apparent shift in the positions of stars. This effect must be considered when
calculating celestial coordinates. The angle of aberration is given by:
𝜃 = arctan(𝑣/𝑐)
Where: 𝑣 is the velocity of the Earth in its orbit around the Sun.
𝑐 is the speed of light.
The aberration causes stars to appear slightly shifted from their true positions, which must be
accounted for in precise astronomical observations.
7. Conclusion:
The celestial sphere is a vital concept in astronomy that simplifies the understanding of the positions
and motions of celestial objects. By providing a framework for celestial coordinates, spherical
trigonometry, and various applications, the celestial sphere serves as an essential tool for
astronomers, navigators, and enthusiasts alike. Understanding its structure and the equations that
govern it is crucial for accurately observing and interpreting the wonders of the night sky.
Through the study of the celestial sphere, we gain insights into the mechanics of the universe,
enhancing our knowledge of celestial phenomena and the intricate relationships that govern the
cosmos. 98
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Concept of time
The concept of time:
The concept of time in astronomy is a profound and multifaceted subject that stretches from ancient
observations of celestial bodies to modern theories involving relativity and the very origin of the
universe. Time serves as the backbone for understanding the cosmos, from the motion of planets and
stars to the evolution of galaxies over billions of years.
Key Aspects of Time in Astronomy:
1. Astronomical Timekeeping and Measurement
2. Time Dilation in Relativity
3. Cosmic Time and the Evolution of the Universe
4. Astronomical Time Scales
5. The Future and Fate of Time in Cosmology
Let’s delve into each aspect in detail:.
99
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Concept of time
1.Astronomical Timekeeping and Measurement:
1.1 Solar Time: In early astronomy, time was primarily measured by the apparent movement of the Sun across the sky.
The day was divided into periods based on the Sun's position, leading to the concept of solar time. A solar day is the
interval from one noon to the next, with noon defined as the time when the Sun is at its highest point in the sky.
However, the length of a solar day varies slightly throughout the year due to Earth’s elliptical orbit and axial tilt. To
account for these irregularities, mean solar time is used, which averages the length of the solar day over the entire
year.
1.2 Sidereal Time: Sidereal time is based on the Earth’s rotation relative to distant stars rather than the Sun. A sidereal day
is about 4 minutes shorter than a solar day because the Earth must rotate slightly more than one full revolution to
bring the Sun back to the same position in the sky.
This time system is crucial for astronomers when tracking stars and deep-space objects, as the same star will rise at
the same sidereal time each night.
1.3 UTC and Julian Date: Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is the modern standard for civil timekeeping. UTC is adjusted
for irregularities in the Earth’s rotation by introducing leap seconds.
Astronomers often use the Julian Date (JD) system, a continuous count of days starting from January 1, 4713 BCE. This
system allows for precise time tracking without the complexities of calendar systems.
1.4 Ephemeris Time: Ephemeris Time (ET) was a time standard used from 1952 to 1976, derived from the motion of
celestial bodies. It was replaced by Terrestrial Time (TT) but is still of historical significance. It was developed to
provide a uniform measure of time for astronomical purposes that is unaffected by irregularities in Earth’s rotation.
100
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Concept of time
2. Time Dilation in Relativity:
In the early 20th century, Einstein’s theory of special relativity revolutionized the concept of time.
One of its key insights is that time is not absolute; it can vary depending on an observer’s velocity or
the strength of gravitational fields.
2.1 Time Dilation in Special Relativity:
When an object moves close to the speed of light, time for that object slows down relative to an
observer at rest. This phenomenon is called time dilation. The equation for time dilation is:
Δ𝑡′= Δ𝑡(1 − 𝑣2/𝑐2)
Where: Δ𝑡′ is the time experienced by the moving observer,
Δ𝑡 is the time experienced by a stationary observer,
𝑣 is the velocity of the moving observer, and 𝑐 is the speed of light.
This has profound implications for space travel and understanding objects moving at relativistic
speeds, such as jets of matter expelled from quasars or near-black-hole phenomena.
101
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Concept of time
2.2 Gravitational Time Dilation:
General relativity expands on this by showing that time is also affected by gravity. Near massive objects like stars or
black holes, the curvature of spacetime causes time to slow down for objects in strong gravitational fields relative to
distant observers.The equation for gravitational time dilation is:
Δ𝑡′ = Δ𝑡(1 − 2𝐺𝑀/𝑟𝑐2)
Where: 𝐺 is the gravitational constant,
𝑀 is the mass of the object,
𝑟 is the distance from the object’s center,
𝑐 is the speed of light.
In regions close to the event horizon of a black hole, time dilation becomes extreme, causing time to essentially stand
still from the perspective of an outside observer.
3. Cosmic Time and the Evolution of the Universe:
3.1 Age of the Universe:
The cosmic time scale begins with the Big Bang, the moment when the universe began expanding from an extremely
hot, dense state. According to current cosmological models, the universe is approximately 13.8 billion years old. The
cosmic timeline encompasses several important stages:
Recombination: Around 380,000 years after the Big Bang, atoms formed, and the universe became transparent to
light, resulting in the cosmic microwave background (CMB) radiation that we observe today.
Stellar Formation: The first stars and galaxies began to form a few hundred million years after the Big Bang.Galactic
Evolution: Over billions of years, galaxies coalesced, evolved, and interacted.
102
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Concept of time
3.2 Hubble’s Law and Time:
The Hubble constant (H₀) is a measure of the rate at which the universe is expanding. It is central to
understanding the relationship between time and the large-scale structure of the universe. The age of the
universe can be estimated from Hubble’s Law:
𝑡 = 1/𝐻0
Where: 𝐻0 is the Hubble constant, expressed in km/s/Mpc.
This gives a rough estimate of the age of the universe by assuming constant expansion, although cosmologists
now know that expansion is accelerating due to dark energy.
4. Astronomical Time Scales:
Astronomy deals with a vast range of time scales, from the milliseconds of pulsar rotations to the billions of years
of galactic evolution.
4.1 Stellar Evolution:
Stars evolve over billions of years, following predictable paths:
Low-mass stars like our Sun spend billions of years fusing hydrogen into helium in their cores.
Massive stars live shorter lives (millions of years) before exploding as supernovae.
The lifetime of a star can be roughly estimated based on its mass using the formula:
𝑡life ∝ 1/𝑀3
Where 𝑡lifet life​ is the star’s lifetime, and 𝑀M is its mass relative to the Sun. 103
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Concept of time
4.2 Pulsar Timekeeping:
Pulsars, highly magnetized, rotating neutron stars, emit beams of radiation that sweep past Earth
at incredibly regular intervals. The rotation periods of some pulsars are measured with an
accuracy rivaling atomic clocks. The study of pulsars has applications in probing extreme physics,
testing general relativity, and measuring time with incredible precision.
4.3 Orbital Mechanics:
Planetary motion provides a natural clock. For instance, the orbital period of Earth around the Sun
defines the year, while the Moon’s orbit around Earth defines the month. Astronomers apply
Kepler’s laws of planetary motion to calculate orbital periods and predict future positions of
celestial bodies.
5. The Future and Fate of Time in Cosmology:
5.1 The Arrow of Time:
In thermodynamics, time is said to have an arrow because entropy (disorder) always increases
over time, giving a directionality to time. In the universe, this principle is linked to the expansion
of the universe. The arrow of time is consistent with the progression from the highly ordered state
of the early universe to the more disordered state of the present and future universe.
104
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Concept of time
5.2 The Fate of the Universe:
Cosmologists consider several possible fates for the universe, each of which has implications for the concept
of time:
Continued Expansion: The universe continues expanding forever, leading to a cold, dark, and empty
universe (the "Big Freeze").
Big Crunch: If dark energy reverses its influence, the universe could eventually collapse back into a hot,
dense state, effectively rewinding time.
Big Rip: In some models, dark energy accelerates the expansion so much that eventually, even atoms and
subatomic particles are torn apart.
In these scenarios, time as we know it would cease to exist as the universe either cools to near absolute
zero or compresses into an incredibly dense point.
• Conclusion:
Time is a fundamental concept in astronomy, from the simple observation of the Sun’s movement across
the sky to the complex relativistic effects near black holes. Time governs the life cycles of stars, the orbits of
planets, and the evolution of the universe itself. Through the lens of both classical mechanics and modern
cosmology, time allows us to place the universe in a structured framework, giving us the tools to predict
celestial events and understand our place in the cosmos.
105
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Equation of Time
• Equation of Time:
To explain the Equation of Time (EoT) along with a figure, let’s break it down with both equations and a
clear description of the graph that typically accompanies this concept.
Equation of Time Overview:
The Equation of Time (EoT) is the difference between solar time (time measured using the Sun's position,
e.g., on a sundial) and mean solar time (the time kept by clocks). The discrepancy arises due to two
primary factors:
Earth’s elliptical orbit around the Sun, which causes its orbital speed to vary (faster at perihelion and
slower at aphelion).
Earth’s axial tilt (obliquity), which affects the Sun’s apparent motion in the sky throughout the year.
The Equation of Time is expressed mathematically as the sum of two components:
One related to orbital eccentricity (Earth's elliptical orbit).
One related to axial tilt (Earth's obliquity).
106
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Equation of Time
Equation of Time Formula:
The general form of the equation is:
E(t) = E1(t) + E2(t)
1. Orbital Eccentricity Component (E1(t))
This component accounts for the variation in the Earth’s speed along its elliptical orbit. The time correction
due to orbital eccentricity is approximately:
E1(t )= 2esin(M)
Where: e is the orbital eccentricity of Earth’s orbit (around 0.0167),
M is the mean anomaly, which is the angle the Earth would have traveled if its orbit were circular.
2. Axial Tilt Component (E2(t)E_2(t)E2​(t))
This component reflects the effect of the Earth’s axial tilt, which alters the Sun’s apparent motion in the
sky. The time correction due to axial tilt (obliquity) is approximately:
E2(t) = tan(ϵ/2)sin(2L)
Where: ϵ is the obliquity (axial tilt of the Earth, about 23.44°),
L is the mean longitude of the Sun. 107
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Equation of Time
Total Equation of Time:
The total Equation of Time is the combination of both corrections:
E(t) = 2esin(M) + tan(ϵ/2)sin(2L)
The result of this equation gives the difference (in minutes) between apparent solar
time and mean solar time on any given day.
Visual Representation: The Analemma
A commonly used figure to visualize the Equation of Time is the Analemma, a figure-
eight-shaped diagram showing the Sun’s position in the sky at the same clock time
over the course of a year.
Description of the Figure:
X-Axis: Represents the difference between solar time and mean solar time (i.e., the Equation of
Time).
Positive values: Solar time is ahead of clock time.
Negative values: Solar time is behind clock time.
Y-Axis: Represents the declination of the Sun, which is its angular position north or south of the
celestial equator.
The figure-eight shape occurs because of the combined effects of axial tilt and orbital
eccentricity.
At different points on the figure:
Maximum positive deviation occurs around early November (the Sun is ahead of mean time).
Maximum negative deviation occurs around mid-February (the Sun is behind mean time). 108
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Equation of Time
Drawing the Analemma
The upper loop of the figure-eight corresponds to the
Sun's position during summer in the northern
hemisphere.
The lower loop corresponds to the Sun's position during
winter.
The horizontal displacement from the center of the
figure shows the time difference due to the Equation of
Time, reaching maxima and minima in early November
and mid-February.
• Summary
The Equation of Time results from the combined
effects of Earth's elliptical orbit and axial tilt. Its value
varies throughout the year, reaching a maximum of
about +16 minutes and a minimum of -16 minutes.
The Analemma provides a visual way to represent
both the Equation of Time and the Sun's declination.
109
The equation of time: above the axis a sundial will
appear fast relative to a clock showing local mean
time, and below the axis a sundial will appear slow
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System
• The Solar System:
Introduction: The Solar System, a complex and dynamic environment, consists of the Sun, planets, moons, asteroids,
comets, and various other celestial bodies. Understanding its formation and construction offers insights into the
processes that shaped not only our cosmic neighborhood but also the broader universe. This account covers the
structure of the Solar System, the theories of its formation, and the evolutionary processes that led to its current
configuration.
1. Structure of the Solar System:
The Solar System can be divided into several key components:
1.1 The Sun:
The Sun is a G-type main-sequence star (G dwarf) at the center of the Solar System, accounting for about 99.86% of its
total mass. It is primarily composed of hydrogen (approximately 74%) and helium (about 24%), with trace amounts of
heavier elements.
Structure of the Sun:
Core: The innermost region where nuclear fusion occurs, converting hydrogen into helium and producing energy.
Radiative Zone: Surrounding the core, energy produced in the core moves outward through radiation.
Convective Zone: In this outer layer, energy is transported by convection currents.
Photosphere: The visible surface of the Sun, from which light is emitted.
Chromosphere and Corona: The outer layers of the Sun’s atmosphere, visible during solar eclipses. 110
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System
1.2 The Planets
The Solar System consists of eight recognized planets, categorized into terrestrial (rocky) planets and gas giants.
Terrestrial Planets:
Mercury: Distance from the Sun: ~57.9 million km
Diameter: 4,880 km
Moons: 0
Key Features: Closest planet to the Sun; extreme temperature fluctuations; heavily cratered surface.
Venus: Distance from the Sun: ~108.2 million km
Diameter: 12,104 km
Moons: 0
Key Features: Similar in size to Earth; thick, toxic atmosphere; surface temperatures can reach up to 465°C.
Earth: Distance from the Sun: ~149.6 million km
Diameter: 12,742 km
Moons: 1 (the Moon)
Key Features: The only known planet to support life; has liquid water and a diverse climate.
Mars: Distance from the Sun: ~227.9 million km
Diameter: 6,779 km
Moons: 2 (Phobos and Deimos)
Key Features: Known as the Red Planet; has the largest volcano and canyon in the Solar System. 111
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System
Gas Giants:
Jupiter: Distance from the Sun: ~778.5 million km
Diameter: 139,820 km
Moons: 79 (including Ganymede, the largest moon)
Key Features: The largest planet; features a Great Red Spot, a massive storm; primarily composed of hydrogen
and helium.
Saturn: Distance from the Sun: ~1.4 billion km
Diameter: 116,460 km
Moons: 83 (including Titan, larger than Mercury)
Key Features: Renowned for its prominent ring system; gas giant made mostly of hydrogen and helium.
Uranus: Distance from the Sun: ~2.9 billion km
Diameter: 50,724 km
Moons: 27 (including Titania and Oberon)
Key Features: An ice giant with a unique tilted rotation axis; has a faint ring system.
Neptune: Distance from the Sun: ~4.5 billion km
Diameter: 49,244 km
Moons: 14 (including Triton)
Key Features: Farthest planet from the Sun; known for strong winds and a deep blue color due to methane in its
atmosphere.
112
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System
1.3 Dwarf Planets:
Dwarf planets are celestial bodies that orbit the Sun but do not clear their orbits. Some notable dwarf planets include:
Pluto: Once considered the ninth planet, now classified as a dwarf planet with five known moons, the largest being
Charon.
Eris: Located in the scattered disc, it’s one of the most massive known dwarf planets.
Haumea and Makemake: Other recognized dwarf planets in the Kuiper Belt.
1.4 Moons:
Many planets have natural satellites, or moons. For example:
Earth: The Moon.
Mars: Phobos and Deimos.
Jupiter and Saturn: Host a multitude of moons, some of which are larger than the planets themselves.
1.5 Asteroids and Comets
Asteroids: Primarily found in the asteroid belt between Mars and Jupiter, these rocky bodies are remnants from the
early Solar System.
Comets: Composed of ice and dust, comets have distinctive tails that develop when they approach the Sun. Famous
examples include Halley's Comet.
113
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System
1.6 Kuiper Belt and Oort Cloud
Kuiper Belt: A region beyond Neptune filled with icy bodies and dwarf planets, believed to be the source of many
short-period comets.
Oort Cloud: A hypothetical cloud of icy bodies surrounding the Solar System, thought to be the source of
long-period comets.
2. Formation of the Solar System
The formation of the Solar System is a complex process that occurred over billions of years and can be broken down
into several key stages:
2.1 The Pre-Solar Nebula
The Solar System originated from a giant molecular cloud, or solar nebula, composed of gas and dust. This nebula may
have been influenced by shock waves from nearby supernovae, causing it to collapse under its own gravity.
2.2 Formation of the Protosun
As the nebula collapsed, it began to rotate and flatten into a disk. Most of the material accumulated at the center,
forming the protosun.
Heating and Nuclear Fusion: As the protosun's core temperature increased, nuclear fusion eventually ignited,
converting hydrogen into helium and producing energy. This process marked the birth of the Sun.
114
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System
2.3 Accretion of Planetesimals:
In the cooler regions of the rotating disk, small dust and ice particles began to stick together through electrostatic
forces, forming planetesimals—small bodies ranging from a few meters to several kilometers in size.
Collisions and Growth:
These planetesimals collided and merged, gradually forming larger bodies called protoplanets. This process, known as
accretion, led to the growth of the first planets.
2.4 Formation of Protoplanets:
As protoplanets grew, their internal heat increased due to radioactive decay and the energy from collisions.
Differentiation: The heat caused the interiors of these bodies to melt, allowing heavier materials to sink to the center
and lighter materials to rise, resulting in layered structures (core, mantle, crust).
2.5 Temperature Gradient and Planet Types
The Solar System's temperature gradient played a crucial role in determining the types of planets that formed:
Terrestrial Planets: Closer to the Sun, where temperatures were too high for volatile compounds to condense, rocky
planets formed (Mercury, Venus, Earth, Mars).
Gas Giants: In the cooler outer regions, gas and ice could condense, leading to the formation of gas giants (Jupiter and
Saturn) and ice giants (Uranus and Neptune).
115
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System
2.6 Clearing the Orbital Zone:
As planets formed and grew larger, their gravitational forces cleared the surrounding debris from their orbits.
Planetary Migration: Some theories suggest that gas giants may have migrated inward and outward due to
gravitational interactions, affecting the arrangement and formation of terrestrial planets.
2.7 Formation of Moons and Rings:
Many moons likely formed from leftover debris or through the capture of passing objects.
Ring Systems: Saturn’s rings are believed to have formed from material that was unable to coalesce into a moon due
to tidal forces exerted by the planet.
2.8 Asteroids and Kuiper Belt
Leftover planetesimals that did not coalesce into planets became asteroids, particularly in the asteroid belt.
Kuiper Belt: Beyond Neptune, icy bodies formed the Kuiper Belt, a remnant of the early Solar System.
2.9 Formation of the Oort Cloud
The Oort Cloud is a hypothetical spherical shell of icy bodies surrounding the Solar System, thought to be the source
of long-period comets.
Scattering: It is believed that interactions with gas giants caused many icy bodies to be scattered into this distant
region. 116
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System
2.10 Timeline of Formation:
Nebula Stage: Approximately 4.6 billion years ago.
Sun Formation: Occurred within the first few million years.
Planet Formation: Planets formed over the next several million years, with terrestrial planets forming before
gas giants.
Stabilization: The Solar System reached a stable configuration approximately 4 billion years ago.
3. Conclusion:
The Solar System is a remarkable product of gravitational dynamics, thermodynamics, and cosmic events.
Its formation involved the complex interplay of processes that began with a nebula and culminated in the
diverse array of celestial bodies we observe today. From the Sun at its center to the distant reaches of the
Kuiper Belt and Oort Cloud, each component of the Solar System tells a story of evolution and change.
Understanding this intricate history not only helps us appreciate our own place in the cosmos but also
informs our search for other planetary systems and the possibility of life beyond Earth. As research
continues and technology advances, we will uncover more about the origins and mechanics of our Solar
System, shedding light on the mysteries of the universe.
117
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System
Sidereal Period:
The sidereal period of a celestial body refers to the time it takes for the body to complete one full orbit around a central object (like
the Sun) relative to the stars. For planets in our solar system, this is the time it takes them to return to the same position against the
background of distant stars.
•For Earth, the sidereal period is one year, or about 365.25 days.
•For other planets, the sidereal period depends on their distance from the Sun (according to Kepler's Third Law).
Synodic Period:
The synodic period is the time between successive conjunctions or alignments of two celestial objects, typically observed from a
third object (such as Earth). For planets, the synodic period is the time between two consecutive alignments with the Sun and Earth,
which is typically longer than the sidereal period.
For example:
•For Mercury and Venus, which are closer to the Sun than Earth, their synodic period is the time between successive inferior
conjunctions (when the planet passes between Earth and the Sun).
•For Mars and the outer planets, the synodic period refers to the time between successive oppositions (when the planet is on the
opposite side of Earth from the Sun).
Example Equations: To calculate the synodic period 𝑆 of a planet relative to Earth:
1/𝑆 = ∣1/𝑃 − 1/𝐸∣
Where: 𝑆 is the synodic period.𝑃P is the planet's sidereal period. 𝐸 is Earth's sidereal period (which is 1 year).
This relationship applies for both inner and outer planets, with different contexts for inferior and superior conjunctions/oppositions.
118
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System
• Precession refers to the slow, conical motion of the rotation axis of a celestial body. For Earth, precession is caused by the gravitational
forces of the Moon and the Sun acting on Earth's equatorial bulge, which makes the axis of Earth's rotation slowly trace out a cone. This
motion results in a gradual shift of the positions of the celestial poles and the equinoxes over a period of about 26,000 years (the
precession cycle). Precession also affects the orientation of the Earth relative to the background stars.
• Example: The North Star will not always be Polaris, because of the Earth's precession. Thousands of years ago, the star Thuban was the
pole star.
• Nutation is a smaller oscillation superimposed on the precessional motion of a celestial body. For Earth, nutation results in a slight
periodic "nodding" motion of the rotation axis. This is mainly caused by the gravitational influence of the Moon and Sun, but it also arises
from the tilt of the Earth's axis relative to its orbital plane. Nutation causes the axis to oscillate around its precessional path in a small
periodic cycle (typically about 18.6 years).
• Example: Nutation causes variations in the Earth's orientation over shorter timescales compared to precession.
• Libration refers to the apparent oscillating motion of the Moon as observed from Earth. It occurs due to variations in the Moon’s speed
along its orbit and the tilt of its rotational axis. As a result, over time, we can observe slightly more than half (about 59%) of the Moon’s
surface, even though the same face of the Moon is always turned towards Earth.
• There are several types of libration:
• Libration in longitude: Due to the elliptical shape of the Moon’s orbit, its speed varies, and we see a bit more of its eastern or western
limb at different points in the orbit.
• Libration in latitude: Caused by the tilt of the Moon’s axis relative to its orbit, allowing us to see slightly more of the Moon's north or
south pole.
• Diurnal libration: This is a small daily oscillation caused by the observer’s perspective from different points on Earth's surface due to its
rotation.
• Example: When the Moon librates, we can observe slightly more of its surface than would otherwise be possible. 119
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System
Eclipses and transits are two fascinating celestial phenomena that have been studied by astronomers
for centuries. They offer valuable insights into the workings of our solar system and beyond. An eclipse
occurs when one celestial body blocks the light from another, casting a shadow on the third, while a
transit happens when a smaller celestial body passes between a larger one and the observer without
completely blocking it. These events are not just visually stunning but also scientifically significant, helping
us understand the orbits of celestial objects, their sizes, distances, and even discover new planets.
In this article, we will explore the causes, effects, equations, and calculations involved in eclipses and
transits, complete with relevant figures for clarity.
Causes of Eclipses: Eclipses are caused by the alignment of celestial bodies. They occur when one celestial
body moves into the shadow of another. The most common eclipses are solar eclipses and lunar eclipses.
1. Solar Eclipse: A solar eclipse occurs when the Moon passes between the Earth and the Sun, casting its
shadow on the Earth. This alignment temporarily blocks sunlight from reaching parts of the Earth. Solar
eclipses can be classified into three types:
Total Solar Eclipse: The Moon completely covers the Sun, and only the Sun’s corona (outer atmosphere)
is visible. This can only happen if the Moon is close enough to Earth in its orbit to fully obscure the Sun.
Partial Solar Eclipse: The Moon covers only part of the Sun. This occurs when the Sun, Moon, and Earth
are not perfectly aligned.
Annular Solar Eclipse: The Moon is too far from the Earth to completely cover the Sun. As a result, a
ring of the Sun remains visible around the Moon, creating a "ring of fire."
120
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System
2. Lunar Eclipse:
• A lunar eclipse occurs when the Earth
passes between the Sun and the Moon,
casting a shadow on the Moon. This causes
the Moon to darken or even turn a reddish
color due to the refraction of sunlight
through the Earth's atmosphere. There are
three types of lunar eclipses:
• Total Lunar Eclipse: The Moon is
completely immersed in Earth’s shadow
(umbra), resulting in a “blood moon” effect
where the Moon appears red.
• Partial Lunar Eclipse: Only part of the
Moon enters Earth’s umbra, leaving the
rest in the penumbral shadow.
• Penumbral Lunar Eclipse: The Moon
passes through only the Earth’s penumbral
shadow, causing a slight dimming of its
brightness.
121
Figure 1: Diagram showing Total, Partial,
and Annular Solar Eclipse
Figure 2: Diagram showing Total, Partial, and
Penumbral Lunar Eclipse
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System
Causes of Transits:
Transits occur when a smaller celestial body passes in front of a
larger one, from the perspective of an observer. Transits within
our solar system generally refer to the transits of Mercury and
transits of Venus, where these planets pass between the Earth
and the Sun. Although rare, transits are important because
they help scientists learn about the planet's orbits and have
historically been used to measure the size of the solar system.
1. Transit of Mercury: The Transit of Mercury happens when
Mercury moves directly between the Earth and the Sun.
Since Mercury is small and far from Earth, it appears as a tiny
black dot moving across the Sun’s surface. Mercury transits
occur about 13 to 14 times every century.
2. Transit of Venus: The Transit of Venus occurs when Venus
passes between the Earth and the Sun. Venus is larger than
Mercury, so its transit is more visible. However, transits of
Venus are rare, occurring in pairs eight years apart, with
more than a century between each pair. The most recent
transits were in 2004 and 2012, and the next ones will occur
in 2117 and 2125. 122
Figure 3: Mercury transiting across the Sun.
Figure 4: Venus transiting across the Sun
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System
Effects of Eclipses:
Eclipses, especially solar eclipses, have noticeable effects on Earth and its environment. They impact both nature and human
perception.
1.Effects of Solar Eclipses:
Temperature Drop: During a total solar eclipse, the sudden blockage of sunlight causes a drop in temperature, often by
several degrees Celsius. This temperature drop is particularly noticeable in the path of totality, where the Sun is
completely obscured.
Animal Behavior: The sudden darkness during a solar eclipse can confuse animals. Birds may stop singing, nocturnal
animals may emerge, and diurnal animals may prepare for sleep. The eclipse can temporarily disrupt the natural behaviors
of wildlife.
Observation of the Solar Corona: The Sun’s outer atmosphere, or corona, is usually too faint to be seen due to the
brightness of the Sun. However, during a total solar eclipse, the corona becomes visible, offering scientists a rare
opportunity to study it in detail.
2. Effects of Lunar Eclipses:
Blood Moon: During a total lunar eclipse, the Moon takes on a reddish tint. This happens because the Earth’s atmosphere
scatters shorter wavelengths of light (like blue), allowing only the longer wavelengths (red) to pass through and illuminate
the Moon.
Cultural and Historical Significance: Lunar eclipses have often been interpreted as omens or signs in various cultures. In
ancient times, they were sometimes seen as warnings of disaster or messages from the gods.
Tidal Effects: While lunar eclipses themselves don’t cause significant tidal changes, the alignment of the Earth, Moon, and
Sun during the event can enhance tidal effects due to the combined gravitational forces. 123
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System
Effects of Transits
Although transits do not have noticeable effects on Earth like eclipses, they are of significant importance in astronomy
and planetary science.
1. Measuring the Astronomical Unit: In the 18th and 19th centuries, transits of Venus were used to measure the
Astronomical Unit (AU), the average distance between the Earth and the Sun. By observing the transit from different
locations on Earth, astronomers could use the principle of parallax to calculate the distance to the Sun, which in turn
helped measure distances within the solar system.
2. Exoplanet Discovery: The transit method is one of the primary techniques used today to discover exoplanets (planets
outside our solar system). When a planet passes in front of its star, it causes a slight dip in the star’s brightness, which
can be detected by telescopes. NASA's Kepler mission and other space telescopes have used this method to discover
thousands of exoplanets.
Equations and Calculations
Predicting eclipses and transits requires understanding the orbits and motions of celestial bodies. Astronomers use
complex equations and models to predict the timing, duration, and visibility of these events.
1. Eclipse Geometry and Calculation: The prediction of eclipses is based on the relative sizes and distances of the Sun,
Moon, and Earth, as well as the geometry of their orbits. The Saros cycle, which lasts about 18 years, 11 days, and 8
hours, is used to predict both solar and lunar eclipses. This cycle is based on the fact that the Sun, Earth, and Moon
return to nearly the same relative positions after this period.
Eclipse Path and Duration: The path of a solar eclipse across the Earth is determined by the Moon’s shadow. The
darkest part of the shadow, the umbra, is where a total eclipse occurs, while the lighter penumbra results in a partial
eclipse. 124
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System
The duration of a total solar eclipse can be calculated using the following equation:
𝑇eclipse = 2 × 𝑅Earth/𝑣Moon
Where: 𝑇eclipse​ is the duration of the eclipse. 𝑅Earth is the radius of the Earth.
𝑣Moon is the velocity of the Moon in its orbit around the Earth.
The Moon’s shadow moves across the Earth at about 1,700 kilometers per hour. The duration of totality during a solar
eclipse can last up to 7.5 minutes, though most total eclipses are shorter.
2. Transit Geometry and Calculations:
The prediction of planetary transits, such as those of Mercury and Venus, relies on knowing the positions of the planets
and their orbits. Kepler’s Laws of Planetary Motion are essential for calculating the timing and duration of transits.
Kepler’s Laws: Law of Ellipses: Planets move in elliptical orbits, with the Sun at one focus.
Law of Equal Areas: A line drawn from a planet to the Sun sweeps out equal areas in equal times.
Law of Periods: The square of a planet’s orbital period is proportional to the cube of its semi-major axis.
Using Kepler’s laws, astronomers can predict when a transit will occur and how long it will last.
Transit Duration:
The formula for calculating the duration of a transit is:
𝑇transit = 2 × 𝑅star/𝑣planet
Where: 𝑇transit is the transit duration. 𝑅star is the radius of the star (for example, the Sun).
𝑣planet is the velocity of the planet across the face of the star. 125
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System
3. Parallax and Distance Measurement: During the transits of Venus in the 18th and 19th centuries, astronomers used
parallax to measure the distance between Earth and the Sun. The parallax method involves observing the transit from
two different points on Earth and measuring the angle of displacement between the two views. The distance to the
Sun can then be calculated using the following equation:
𝐷 = 𝑏tan(𝜃)
Where: 𝐷 is the distance to the Sun.
𝑏 is the baseline, or the distance between the two observation points on Earth.
𝜃 is the parallax angle.
Predictions of Eclipses and Transits:
The ability to predict eclipses and transits has greatly improved over time thanks to advancements in astronomy and
mathematics.
1. Predicting Solar and Lunar Eclipses:
Eclipse prediction is based on precise calculations of the orbits of the Moon and Earth. The Saros cycle, as mentioned
earlier, is one of the most reliable methods for predicting when and where eclipses will occur. For example, a solar
eclipse that occurs today will have a near-identical eclipse 18 years, 11 days, and 8 hours later.
Modern astronomy tools, such as specialized software and high-precision orbital models, allow astronomers to predict
eclipses thousands of years into the future. Eclipse maps, which show the path of totality for solar eclipses, can be
generated decades in advance, allowing enthusiasts and scientists to prepare for these rare events.
126
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System
2. Predicting Transits of Mercury and Venus
The orbits of Mercury and Venus are well-known, allowing astronomers to predict transits with great accuracy.
The transits of Venus, in particular, occur in a predictable pattern, with pairs of transits separated by more than
100 years. The next transits of Venus will occur in December 2117 and December 2125.Mercury transits occur
more frequently, approximately 13 or 14 times every century. The next Mercury transit is expected to occur in
2032.
Conclusion:
Eclipses and transits are two extraordinary celestial events that capture the imagination of both
scientists and the public. While they may appear as mere visual spectacles, they hold profound scientific
significance, helping us measure distances in space, understand planetary orbits, and discover new
worlds beyond our solar system.
The causes of these phenomena are rooted in the precise alignment of celestial bodies, with eclipses
involving the blocking of light and transits involving the passage of smaller objects in front of larger
ones. The effects of these events range from observable changes on Earth, such as temperature drops
during solar eclipses, to breakthroughs in astronomical research, such as the discovery of exoplanets
using the transit method.
By applying principles of geometry, physics, and orbital mechanics, astronomers can predict and study
these events with remarkable accuracy. Whether you’re witnessing the dramatic darkness of a total
solar eclipse or tracking the slow, subtle transit of a planet across the Sun, these events remind us of the
intricate and awe-inspiring dynamics of our universe. 127
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Space Exploration
• Space Exploration:
Introduction: Space exploration encompasses the investigation of outer space through manned and unmanned
missions. It involves the use of technology to gather information about celestial bodies, the universe, and potential
habitats for life beyond Earth. This exploration has significantly advanced our understanding of the cosmos and our
place within it.
1.Historical Context:
1.1 Early Observations:[
Ancient Astronomy: Civilizations such as the Babylonians, Greeks, and Chinese made early astronomical observations.
They documented celestial events and developed models to explain the movements of celestial bodies.
Telescopes: The invention of the telescope in the early 17th century revolutionized astronomy. Notable figures like
Galileo Galilei used telescopes to make groundbreaking discoveries, including the moons of Jupiter.
1.2 The Space Race:
Post-World War II Era: The Cold War rivalry between the United States and the Soviet Union spurred significant
advancements in space exploration.
Sputnik 1: Launched by the Soviet Union in 1957, it was the first artificial satellite, marking the beginning of the space
age and igniting the space race.
Human Spaceflight: Yuri Gagarin became the first human in space in 1961, followed by several significant U.S.
missions, including John Glenn’s orbit of Earth.
128
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Space Exploration
1.3 The Apollo Program:
Apollo 11: In 1969, Apollo 11 successfully landed the first humans on the Moon—Neil Armstrong and Buzz Aldrin. This marked a
pivotal achievement in human space exploration.
Subsequent Missions: The Apollo program continued with five more Moon landings, gathering valuable data about the lunar
surface and geology.
2. Advancements in Technology:
2.1 Rockets and Launch Vehicles:
Launch Systems: Various rocket designs, such as the Saturn V (used in the Apollo missions) and the Space Shuttle, have played
crucial roles in launching payloads into space.
Reusable Rockets: Companies like SpaceX have pioneered reusable rocket technology, reducing costs and increasing access to
space.
2.2 Satellites:
Types of Satellites: Communication, weather, reconnaissance, and scientific satellites have revolutionized our ability to observe
and understand Earth and other celestial bodies.
Global Positioning System (GPS): Satellite technology has enabled precise navigation and timekeeping.
2.3 Space Probes and Rovers:
Unmanned Missions: Probes like Voyager 1 and 2 have traveled beyond the Solar System, sending back valuable data about the
outer planets and interstellar space.
Rovers: Rovers like NASA's Curiosity and Perseverance have explored Mars, conducting experiments and searching for signs of
past life. 129
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Space Exploration
3. Key Missions and Discoveries:
3.1 Robotic Missions:
Voyager Program: Launched in 1977, the Voyager probes have provided unprecedented data about the outer planets
and are now in interstellar space.
Mars Rovers: Missions like Spirit, Opportunity, Curiosity, and Perseverance have significantly advanced our
understanding of Mars’ geology and potential for life.
3.2 Human Spaceflight:
International Space Station (ISS): A joint project involving multiple countries, the ISS serves as a microgravity
laboratory for scientific research and international collaboration.
Commercial Spaceflight: Private companies like SpaceX and Blue Origin are developing human spaceflight capabilities,
paving the way for commercial ventures beyond Earth.
3.3 Space Telescopes:
Hubble Space Telescope: Launched in 1990, Hubble has provided stunning images and data, significantly enhancing
our understanding of the universe, including the expansion rate and the existence of exoplanets.
James Webb Space Telescope (JWST): Launched in December 2021, JWST aims to observe the universe in infrared,
exploring the formation of stars and galaxies.
130
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Space Exploration
4. Scientific Discoveries:
4.1 Understanding the Universe:
Big Bang Theory: Space exploration has supported the Big Bang theory, explaining the universe's origin and
expansion.
Exoplanets: Discoveries of exoplanets have revolutionized our understanding of potential habitats for life beyond
Earth.
4.2 Mars Exploration:
Water Evidence: Rovers and orbiters have found evidence of past water on Mars, raising questions about its potential
to host life.Sample Return Missions: Upcoming missions aim to bring Martian samples back to Earth for detailed
analysis.4.3 Outer Solar System
Voyager Discoveries: The Voyager missions provided data about the gas giants (Jupiter and Saturn), their moons, and
the characteristics of the Kuiper Belt.New Horizons: The 2015 flyby of Pluto offered insights into this dwarf planet and
its moons.
5. Future of Space Exploration:
5.1 Human Exploration of Mars:
Artemis Program: NASA’s Artemis program aims to return humans to the Moon by the mid-2020s, establishing a
sustainable presence to prepare for future Mars missions.
Mars Colonization: Plans for crewed missions to Mars are being developed, with the goal of establishing a human
presence on the Red Planet.
131
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Space Exploration
5.2 Space Tourism:
Commercial Ventures: Companies like SpaceX, Blue Origin, and Virgin Galactic are working toward making space
tourism a reality, providing opportunities for civilians to experience space travel.
5.3 Astrobiology and Search for Life:
Future Missions: Upcoming missions are focused on exploring moons like Europa and Enceladus, which may harbor
subsurface oceans and potential for life.
SETI Initiatives: The Search for Extraterrestrial Intelligence (SETI) continues to analyze signals from space in the quest
for signs of intelligent life.5.4 International Collaboration
Global Partnerships: Future exploration will increasingly rely on international collaboration, with countries working
together on projects like the ISS and joint planetary missions.
Conclusion:
Space exploration represents humanity's quest to understand the universe and our place within it. From ancient
observations to modern missions that push the boundaries of technology and human capability, our journey into
space has yielded remarkable discoveries and technological advancements. As we look to the future, the potential for
exploration and discovery remains vast, with the promise of answering fundamental questions about life, the cosmos,
and our own existence.
132
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Stellar Evolution
• Stellar Evolution: A Comprehensive Overview
Stellar evolution describes the life cycle of stars, from their formation to
their ultimate fate. This journey spans millions to billions of years,
involving complex physical processes such as nuclear fusion, gravitational
collapse, and stellar winds. The evolution of a star depends on its mass,
with different stars following distinct evolutionary paths. In this article,
we'll explore stellar evolution in detail, breaking down the various stages a
star undergoes, including the processes that govern these transformations.
1. Stellar Birth: From Nebula to Protostar
Nebula:
Stars are born in vast clouds of gas and dust, called nebulae, which contain
mainly hydrogen and helium. Over time, gravitational forces cause regions
of these clouds to collapse. External factors, such as nearby supernovae,
can also trigger the collapse. As the cloud contracts, it begins to heat up
and form a dense core called a protostar.
The protostar continues to gather material from its surrounding cloud,
increasing in temperature and pressure. When the core temperature
reaches approximately 10 million Kelvin, nuclear fusion begins. At this
point, the star achieves hydrostatic equilibrium, where the inward
gravitational pull is balanced by the outward pressure from nuclear
reactions. 133
Figure 1: A Nebulae collapsing under
gravity with protostar forming
in its core.
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Stellar Evolution
2. The Main Sequence: A Star's Longest Phase
The main sequence is the longest and most stable phase in a star's
life, where hydrogen is continuously fused into helium in the core.
The star’s position on the Hertzsprung-Russell (H-R) Diagram during
this phase is determined by its mass and temperature, ranging from
hot, blue stars to cool, red stars. The majority of a star's life is spent
in this phase.
In smaller stars like the Sun, the proton-proton chain is the
dominant fusion mechanism. For more massive stars, the CNO cycle
(carbon-nitrogen-oxygen) facilitates hydrogen fusion. The rate of
fusion and the star's mass directly affect its luminosity and lifespan.
Massive stars burn their fuel quickly and live shorter lives, while
low-mass stars can persist for billions of years.
2.
3. Diverging Evolutionary Paths: The Role of Mass
Stars evolve differently based on their mass. Stellar mass plays a
critical role in determining how a star will evolve after exhausting its
hydrogen supply in the core.
Low-Mass Stars (0.1-0.5 solar masses):
Low-mass stars, such as red dwarfs, burn hydrogen at a very slow
rate. These stars can live for trillions of years, and due to their slow
fusion rate, they never evolve beyond the main sequence within the
current age of the universe.
134
Figure 2: Hertzsprung-Russell diagram showing the
main sequence stars.
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Stellar Evolution
Intermediate-Mass Stars (0.5-8 solar masses):
Stars like the Sun fall into this category. When hydrogen in the core is
depleted, they evolve into red giants and eventually shed their outer layers to
form planetary nebulae. The core becomes a white dwarf.
High-Mass Stars (greater than 8 solar masses):
Massive stars have a more dramatic life cycle, leading to their end in
supernovae, with their cores potentially forming neutron stars or black holes.
4. Post-Main Sequence Evolution:
Red Giant Phase:
After exhausting the hydrogen in its core, a star no longer generates sufficient
outward pressure to counteract gravity, causing the core to collapse. In turn,
the outer layers expand significantly, and the star enters the red giant phase.
In the core of the red giant, helium begins to fuse into carbon through the
triple-alpha process. The outer layers become cooler and more luminous,
giving the star its red hue.
Helium Burning and Shell Fusion:
In intermediate-mass stars, after the helium in the core is depleted, fusion
shifts to shells surrounding the core. Hydrogen and helium fusion occur in
concentric shells, while the core contracts further, eventually resulting in the
star shedding its outer layers. 135
Figure 3: Evolutionary pathways of low,
intermediate, and high-mass stars.
Figure 4: A red giant star with expanded
outer layers and a contracted core.
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Stellar Evolution
5. The Final Phases for Low and Intermediate-Mass Stars:
Planetary Nebula:
In intermediate-mass stars, the red giant sheds its outer layers, creating a
beautiful shell of ionized gas known as a planetary nebula. The exposed
core of the star, now a white dwarf, emits ultraviolet light, which causes
the ejected gas to glow.
White Dwarf: The remaining core, now a white dwarf, is composed mainly
of carbon and oxygen. No further nuclear fusion occurs in the white dwarf,
and it slowly cools over billions of years, eventually becoming a cold, inert
black dwarf (though no black dwarfs exist yet, as the universe is too
young).
6. High-Mass Star Evolution: More Dramatic Endings
Supergiant Phase: For stars more massive than about 8 solar masses, the
post-main sequence evolution is much more energetic. These stars expand
into supergiants and continue fusing elements heavier than helium.
Through a series of nuclear burning stages, elements like carbon, oxygen,
neon, and silicon fuse in the core, culminating in the production of iron.
Since fusion of iron requires energy rather than releases it, the star can no
longer sustain fusion to produce energy. This marks the beginning of the
end. 136
Figure 5: A planetary nebula, with a white
dwarf at its center and glowing gas
surrounding it.
Figure 6: A white dwarf surrounded by a
planetary nebula
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Stellar Evolution
Supernova:
Once the iron core becomes too massive, it collapses under its own gravity, triggering a supernova explosion. The core
collapses to an incredibly dense state, while the outer layers are violently expelled into space. Supernovae play a
crucial role in the cosmic distribution of heavy elements, seeding the universe with elements necessary for planets and
life.
7. The Fate of Massive Stars:
Neutron Stars and Black Holes:
Neutron Stars:
If the remaining core after a supernova has a mass between 1.4 and 3 times that of the Sun, it will collapse into a
neutron star. These incredibly dense objects are composed almost entirely of neutrons. Some neutron stars spin
rapidly, emitting beams of radiation from their magnetic poles, known as pulsars.
137
Figure 7: Structure of a supergiant star, with
multiple fusion shells around an
iron core.
Figure 8: Supernova explosion, ejecting
material into space.
Figure 9: Neutron star with its magnetic
poles emitting radiation as a pulsar.
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Stellar Evolution
Black Holes:
If the core remaining after a supernova exceeds three solar
masses, it collapses into a black hole, a region of space
where gravity is so strong that nothing, not even light, can
escape. Material that falls into the black hole forms an
accretion disk, which emits intense radiation as it spirals
inward.
8. Stellar Recycling and Galactic Enrichment:
The ejected material from planetary nebulae and
supernovae enriches the interstellar medium with heavy
elements such as carbon, oxygen, and iron. This "recycling"
of stellar material is crucial for the formation of new stars,
planets, and eventually life.
Star Formation:
Nebulae enriched with elements from previous generations
of stars collapse to form new stars, continuing the cycle of
stellar evolution. This process highlights the interconnection
of stars, planets, and life in the universe.
138
Figure 10: A black hole surrounded by an
accretion disk.
Figure 11: The cycle of stellar formation and
death, showing how material from
dying stars contributes to the
formation of new ones.
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Stellar Evolution
Summary of Stellar Evolution Stages:
Conclusion:
Stellar evolution is a fascinating and complex process, driven by the interplay of nuclear fusion, gravity, and the mass
of the star. From the birth of stars in nebulae to their deaths as white dwarfs, neutron stars, or black holes, the life
cycle of a star is a vital part of the cosmic ecosystem. Understanding stellar evolution not only sheds light on the
mechanics of the universe but also on the origins of the elements that make up planets and life itself.
139
Stage Mass Range Key Process Outcome
Nebula All masses Gravitational collapse of gas and dust Protostar
Main Sequence 0.1–100 solar masses Hydrogen fusion in the core Red Giant/Supergiant
Red Giant 0.5–8 solar masses Helium fusion in the core, shell fusion
of hydrogen
Planetary Nebula, White Dwarf
Supergiant >8 solar masses Fusion of heavier elements until iron
forms in the core
Supernova
White Dwarf 0.5–8 solar masses Gradual cooling of degenerate carbon-
oxygen core
Black Dwarf (theoretical)
Neutron Star 1.4–3 solar masses Collapse of core into neutrons Pulsar (in some cases)
Black Hole >3 solar masses Core collapses beyond
neutron degeneracy pressure
Singularity, Event Horizon
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Galactic Evolution
• Galactic Structure, Composition, and
Evolution:
1. Introduction to Galaxies
Galaxies are vast systems of stars, gas, dust, and dark
matter bound together by gravity. They serve as the
fundamental building blocks of the universe and play
a vital role in its structure and evolution.
Understanding galaxies provides insights into the
processes of star formation, the dynamics of cosmic
structures, and the overall history of the universe.
1.1 Importance of Studying Galaxies
Studying galaxies is essential for answering
fundamental questions about the nature of the
universe, including the formation of stars and
planetary systems, the evolution of cosmic structures,
and the interplay of dark matter and energy. By
examining galaxies, astronomers can piece together
the story of the cosmos from its inception to its
eventual fate.
140
Figure 1: Diagram illustrating the components of a spiral
galaxy, highlighting the bulge, disk, spiral arms, and halo.
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Galactic Evolution
2. Galactic Structure
Galaxies exhibit a diverse range of structures, each with unique features. The primary components of galaxies can be
classified into distinct regions.
2.1 Components of Galaxies
Bulge: The bulge is the central, rounded region of a galaxy, typically containing a high density of older stars, gas, and
dust. It often harbors a supermassive black hole at its center, influencing the dynamics of the surrounding region. Bulges
can vary in size, shape, and stellar population.
Disk: A flat, rotating region that surrounds the bulge, containing stars, gas, and dust. The disk is where most star
formation occurs, particularly in the spiral arms. It contains a mix of old and young stars, along with regions of active
star formation.
Halo: A spherical region surrounding the galaxy that contains older stars, globular clusters, and dark matter. The halo
extends well beyond the visible components of the galaxy and is characterized by low-density stellar populations.
Spiral Arms: Found in spiral galaxies, these are regions of higher density where star formation is particularly active. The
spiral arms are characterized by bright, young stars and often contain molecular clouds and HII regions.
Dark Matter Halo: An invisible component that constitutes most of a galaxy’s mass, inferred from gravitational effects
on visible matter. Dark matter does not emit or absorb light, making it challenging to detect directly.
141
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Galactic Evolution
2.2 Morphological Classification of Galaxies
Galaxies are classified based on their morphology into
several types:
Spiral Galaxies:
Characterized by a flat disk with spiral arms and a central
bulge. They are rich in gas and dust, and actively forming
stars. Examples include the Milky Way and the Andromeda
Galaxy.
Elliptical Galaxies:
These have an ellipsoidal shape and are mostly composed
of older stars, with little gas and dust. They are generally
classified from E0 (nearly spherical) to E7 (more elongated).
Irregular Galaxies:
Lack a distinct shape and often appear chaotic. They are
typically rich in gas and dust and exhibit active star
formation.
Lenticular Galaxies:
Intermediate between spiral and elliptical galaxies,
possessing a central bulge and a disk but lacking significant
spiral structure.
142
Figure 2: Hubble classification scheme illustrating
different types of galaxies.
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Galactic Evolution
3. Composition of Galaxies
The composition of galaxies encompasses various
components that contribute to their overall structure and
dynamics.
3.1 Stellar Population
Population I Stars:
Young, metal-rich stars found in the disk and spiral arms,
actively forming from the interstellar medium (ISM). These
stars are typically hot and luminous.
Population II Stars:
Older stars located in the bulge and halo, characterized by
lower metallicity and minimal ongoing star formation. They
are generally cooler and less luminous than Population I
stars.
Population III Stars:
Hypothetical first stars formed after the Big Bang,
composed almost entirely of hydrogen and helium. They
are believed to have been very massive and short-lived,
playing a crucial role in reionizing the universe.
143
Figure 3: Diagram showing the distribution of the
interstellar medium in a spiral galaxy, highlighting
molecular clouds and HII regions.
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Galactic Evolution
3.2 Interstellar Medium (ISM)
The ISM consists of the matter that exists in the space between stars within a
galaxy. It plays a crucial role in star formation:
Molecular Clouds:
Dense regions of gas where star formation occurs. These clouds are the primary
sites of new stellar creation and are typically composed of hydrogen molecules.
HII Regions:
Areas of ionized hydrogen around young, hot stars, indicating regions of active
star formation. These regions are often associated with bright emission nebulae.
3.3 Dark Matter
Dark matter is a significant component of galaxies, making up about 85% of their
total mass. Its presence is inferred from gravitational effects on visible matter:
Evidence for Dark Matter:
Observations of galaxy rotation curves and gravitational lensing provide indirect
evidence for dark matter's existence. Galaxies rotate at such speeds that,
without dark matter, they would not be able to hold themselves together.
Dark Matter Halo:
The dark matter halo surrounds the visible components of galaxies, influencing
their gravitational binding and dynamics.
144
Figure 4: Diagram illustrating the rotation curves
of galaxies and the influence of dark matter on
their structure.
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Galactic Evolution
4. Evolution of Galaxies
Galactic evolution involves the processes that shape
galaxies over cosmic time, from their formation to their
ultimate fate.
4.1 Formation of Galaxies
Early Universe:
Following the Big Bang, the universe cooled, allowing
protons and neutrons to form hydrogen and helium
nuclei. Small density fluctuations in the primordial gas
led to the formation of the first stars and galaxies.
Hierarchical Merging:
Galaxies formed through the merging of smaller proto-
galaxies. This process, known as hierarchical clustering,
continues to influence galaxy evolution today. Larger
galaxies gradually grew by accreting smaller ones,
leading to the diverse range of galactic morphologies
observed today.
145
Figure 5: Simulation showing the hierarchical merging
of proto-galaxies in the early universe.
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Galactic Evolution
4.2 Star Formation and Feedback Mechanisms
Star Formation:
Stars form from the gravitational collapse of gas in molecular clouds. The
rate of star formation varies among different types of galaxies and is
influenced by the availability of gas. Factors such as density, temperature,
and external pressures can affect the star formation rate.
Feedback Mechanisms:
The energy released from supernovae, stellar winds, and active galactic
nuclei (AGN) can heat and expel gas from galaxies, regulating star
formation. This feedback can lead to the quenching of star formation in
certain galaxies.
4.3 Galactic Mergers and Interactions
Galaxies frequently interact and merge, leading to significant changes in
their structure:
Major Mergers:
Occur between galaxies of similar mass, often resulting in dramatic
increases in star formation as gas is compressed. These mergers can lead
to the formation of elliptical galaxies from spirals.
Minor Mergers:
Involve a larger galaxy accreting smaller satellite galaxies. These
interactions can redistribute stars and gas, influencing the evolution of
the larger galaxy.
146
Figure 6: A simulation of a major merger between
two spiral galaxies, illustrating the star formation
triggered by gravitational interactions.
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Galactic Evolution
4.4 Role of Active Galactic Nuclei (AGN)
Supermassive black holes at the centers of galaxies can become active, leading to the
formation of active galactic nuclei (AGN). These regions emit vast amounts of energy
and can significantly affect their host galaxies:
Types of AGN:
Include quasars, Seyfert galaxies, and blazars, each characterized by their unique
spectral signatures and luminosities.
Impact on Evolution:
AGN feedback can regulate star formation by heating the surrounding gas, preventing it
from collapsing to form new stars. This process can create a balance between star
formation and AGN activity.
5. The Life Cycle of Galaxies
5.1 Star Formation Histories
The star formation history of a galaxy reflects its evolutionary path. Different galaxies
exhibit varying rates and patterns of star formation based on their environments and
interactions.
Starburst Galaxies:
These galaxies experience rapid star formation over a short period, often triggered by
interactions or mergers. This intense activity can consume available gas, leading to a
decline in star formation rates afterward.
Quiescent Galaxies:
Galaxies that exhibit little to no star formation. These typically include older elliptical
galaxies, which have exhausted their gas supply. 147
Figure 7: Graph depicting star formation rates
over cosmic time, showing the evolution of
different types of galaxies.
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Galactic Evolution
5.2 The Fate of Galaxies
As galaxies evolve, their fate will be determined by various factors, including their mass,
interactions, and the availability of gas.
Dry Mergers:
Over time, many galaxies will merge, leading to “dry mergers” where little new star
formation occurs due to the depletion of gas. This process can lead to the growth of
massive elliptical galaxies.
Distant Future:
In the far future, the universe will likely become increasingly dominated by red, dead
galaxies with minimal star formation. The Milky Way, for example, will collide with
Andromeda, potentially forming a single large galaxy.
5.3 Cosmic Recycling
The lifecycle of stars within galaxies contributes to the enrichment of the interstellar
medium with heavy elements, which are essential for forming new stars and planetary
systems. This process, often referred to as cosmic recycling, plays a critical role in
galactic evolution:
Supernova Explosions:
When massive stars exhaust their nuclear fuel, they explode as supernovae, dispersing
elements such as carbon, oxygen, and iron into the ISM. This material enriches the gas
from which new stars form.
Planetary Nebulae:
Less massive stars end their lives by shedding their outer layers, forming planetary
nebulae that release enriched material back into the ISM. 148
Figure 8: Diagram showing the recycling of
stellar material through supernovae and
planetary nebulae into the ISM.
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Galactic Evolution
6. Observational Techniques in Galactic Astronomy
Understanding galaxies relies on various observational techniques, each
providing unique insights into their structure and evolution.
6.1 Photometry and Spectroscopy
Photometry:
Measures the brightness of galaxies in different wavelengths, helping to
determine their stellar populations and star formation rates. It provides
information about the distribution of stars and the presence of dust.
Spectroscopy:
Analyzes the light from galaxies to reveal their chemical composition,
velocity, and distance. It is essential for understanding the dynamics of
galaxies and the nature of their stellar populations.
6.2 Radio Observations
Radio Telescopes:
Used to study the cold gas in galaxies, including neutral hydrogen (HI) and
molecular clouds. This is critical for understanding star formation processes
and the distribution of gas within galaxies.
149
Figure 9: Image of a galaxy observed in radio
wavelengths, highlighting regions of cold gas.
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Galactic Evolution
6.3 Gravitational Lensing
Gravitational Lensing:
A powerful tool for studying dark matter distribution
in galaxies. The bending of light from distant objects
provides insights into the mass and structure of
galaxies.
6.4 Infrared and X-ray Observations
Infrared Observations:
Useful for studying dust-enshrouded regions of star
formation, allowing astronomers to see through the
dust and observe star-forming regions.
X-ray Observations:
Provide insights into the hot gas in galaxy clusters and
the activity of supermassive black holes. X-ray
emission can indicate regions of high-energy
processes, such as starbursts or AGN activity.
150
Figure 10: Example of gravitational lensing showing the distortion of
background galaxies due to a foreground galaxy’s mass.
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Galactic Evolution
7. Case Studies in Galactic Evolution
7.1 The Milky Way Galaxy
The Milky Way is a barred spiral galaxy, home to our solar system. Its structure, composition, and evolution provide a model for
understanding other galaxies.
Structure:
The Milky Way's structure includes a central bulge, a flat disk with spiral arms, and a vast halo of dark matter. It hosts various stellar
populations, including Population I and II stars.
Star Formation:
Active star formation occurs primarily in the spiral arms, with numerous regions of ongoing star formation.
Future:
The Milky Way is on a collision course with the Andromeda Galaxy, expected to occur in about 4.5 billion years, leading to significant
structural changes.
7.2 The Andromeda Galaxy
Andromeda (M31) is the nearest spiral galaxy to the Milky Way and serves as an important case study for galactic interactions.
Structure:
Andromeda has a prominent central bulge and extensive spiral arms rich in gas and young stars.
Mergers:
It has experienced numerous minor mergers with satellite galaxies, which have contributed to its growth and evolution.
Future Interaction:
The impending merger with the Milky Way will create a new galaxy, potentially altering the star formation dynamics in both galaxies.
151
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Galactic Evolution
7.3 The Triangulum Galaxy
Triangulum (M33) is another nearby spiral galaxy, smaller than both the Milky Way and Andromeda, but significant for its
distinct structure.
Structure:
Triangulum has a well-defined spiral structure with prominent arms, and its stellar populations are primarily young,
indicating active star formation.
Role in the Local Group:
As a member of the Local Group, Triangulum provides insights into the dynamics of galaxy interactions and the evolution of
smaller galaxies.
8. Future Directions in Galactic Research
The study of galaxies is an evolving field, with new technologies and methods continually enhancing our understanding of
galactic structure and evolution.
8.1 Upcoming Observatories
James Webb Space Telescope (JWST):
Launched in December 2021, JWST is expected to revolutionize our understanding of galaxies by observing them in infrared
wavelengths, providing insights into star formation and the early universe.
Square Kilometer Array (SKA):
This upcoming radio telescope will enable high-resolution observations of neutral hydrogen across the universe, shedding
light on galaxy formation and evolution.
152
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Galactic Evolution
8.2 Simulation and Modeling
Advancements in computational astrophysics are enhancing our
ability to simulate galaxy formation and evolution. Large-scale
simulations help researchers understand the complex interactions
and dynamics of galaxies.
8.3 Exploring Dark Matter and Energy
Understanding dark matter and dark energy remains a crucial
frontier in astrophysics. Ongoing research aims to elucidate their
roles in galaxy formation, structure, and the fate of the universe.
9. Conclusion
Galaxies are complex systems with rich structures, compositions,
and evolutionary histories. Understanding their formation and
evolution is vital for piecing together the history of the universe. As
research advances, our knowledge of galaxies will continue to
expand, revealing even more about their role in the cosmos.
153
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Cosmology
•Cosmology: An In-Depth Exploration
1. Introduction to Cosmology
Cosmology is the scientific study of the universe's origin, evolution, structure, and eventual fate. It combines insights from
astronomy, physics, and mathematics to address fundamental questions about the cosmos.
1.1 Importance of Cosmology
Understanding cosmology allows us to answer questions about:
The origin of the universe.
The nature and distribution of matter and energy.
The ultimate fate of the universe.
2. Historical Background
2.1 Ancient Cosmologies
Mythological Views: Early civilizations developed mythological explanations for cosmic phenomena, often involving deities and
creation myths.
Geocentric Model: In ancient Greece, thinkers like Aristotle and Ptolemy proposed that Earth was the universe's center, a view
that persisted for centuries.
2.2 The Heliocentric Model
Copernicus: Proposed the heliocentric model, which positioned the Sun at the center of the solar system, challenging the
geocentric view.
Galileo: Provided observational support for the heliocentric model, notably through telescopic observations of celestial bodies.
154
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Cosmology
2.3 Modern Cosmology
Hubble's Discovery: Edwin Hubble's observations in the 1920s revealed that distant galaxies are receding from us,
leading to the understanding that the universe is expanding.
3. Fundamental Principles of Cosmology
3.1 The Cosmological Principle
The cosmological principle states that the universe is homogeneous and isotropic when viewed on large scales:
Homogeneous: Uniformity in matter distribution across vast distances.
Isotropic: Identical appearance of the universe in all directions.
3.2 The Friedmann-Lemaître-Robertson-Walker (FLRW) Metric
The FLRW metric describes a universe that is both homogeneous and isotropic. It is represented mathematically by
the line element:
ds2 = − c2dt2 + a2(t)[dr2/(1 − kr2) + r2(dθ2 + sin2θ dϕ2)]
Where: ds2 : Spacetime interval.
c : Speed of light.
a(t) : Scale factor, describing how distances in the universe change with time.
k: Curvature of space (0 for flat, +1 for closed, -1 for open).
155
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Cosmology
3.3 Scale Factor and Expansion of the Universe
The scale factor a(t) quantifies the expansion of the universe:
a(t) = R(t)/R0
Where: R(t): Size of the universe at time ttt.
R0 : Size of the universe at the present time.
3.4 The Friedmann Equations
The Friedmann equations describe the dynamics of cosmic expansion, derived from Einstein's field equations:
First Friedmann Equation:
(a˙/a)2 = (8πG/3)ρ − kc2/a2 + Λc2/3
Second Friedmann Equation:
a¨a = − (4πG/3)(ρ + 3p/c2) + Λc2/3
Where: a˙˙: Time derivative of the scale factor (expansion rate).
ρ: Density of the universe.
p: Pressure of the universe.
G: Gravitational constant.
Λ: Cosmological constant.
156
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Cosmology
4. Structure of the Universe
4.1 Large-Scale Structure
The universe exhibits a complex large-scale structure
composed of galaxies, galaxy clusters, and superclusters. The
distribution can be visualized through:
Galaxy Filaments: Massive threads of galaxies and dark matter.
Voids: Vast empty spaces between galaxy filaments.
4.2 The Cosmic Web
The cosmic web is a pattern of galaxy distribution that
resembles a web, with dense regions (filaments and clusters)
and large voids. This structure results from gravitational
interactions and the expansion of the universe.
157
Figure 1: Visualization of the large-scale
structure of the universe.
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Cosmology
5. Composition of the Universe
5.1 Ordinary Matter (Baryonic Matter)
Ordinary matter constitutes about 5% of the universe. This
includes:
Stars
Planets
Gas and dust
5.2 Dark Matter
Dark matter is a form of matter that does not emit light or
energy, making it invisible and detectable only through its
gravitational effects. It makes up approximately 27% of the
universe.
Evidence for Dark Matter:
Galactic Rotation Curves: Observations show that stars in
galaxies rotate at speeds that cannot be explained by the visible
mass alone.
Gravitational Lensing: Light from distant galaxies is bent around
massive objects, indicating unseen mass. 158
Figure 2: Diagram illustrating the effect of
dark matter on galaxy rotation curves.
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Cosmology
5.3 Dark Energy
Dark energy is a mysterious force driving the accelerated expansion of
the universe, accounting for about 68% of its total energy density. Its
nature is still not fully understood.
Equation of State: The equation of state parameter www relates
pressure p to density ρ:
w = p/ρc2
Where: w ≈ −1 for dark energy.
6. The Expanding Universe
6.1 Hubble's Law
Hubble's Law describes the relationship between a galaxy's distance
and its recessional velocity:
v = H0d
Where: v: Recessional velocity of a galaxy.
H0 : Hubble constant (rate of expansion of the universe).
d: Distance to the galaxy.
159
Figure 3: Illustration of the cosmic
microwave background radiation.
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Cosmology
6.2 Cosmic Microwave Background (CMB)
The CMB is the remnant radiation from the Big Bang, providing
crucial evidence for the hot early state of the universe. It is a
nearly uniform blackbody spectrum with a temperature of
about 2.7 K.
6.3 Structure Formation
Large-scale structure formation in the universe occurred
through gravitational instabilities in the early universe, leading
to the clustering of matter into galaxies and galaxy clusters.
7. Key Equations in Cosmology
7.1 Einstein's Field Equations
The foundation of general relativity relates the geometry of
spacetime to the energy content:
Gμν = (8πG/c4)Tμν
​Where: Gμν : Einstein tensor representing curvature.
Tμν : Energy-momentum tensor.
160
Figure 4: Visualization of cosmic structure formation over time.
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Cosmology
7.2 Critical Density
The critical density ρcrho_cρc determines the geometry of the
universe:
ρc = 3H0
2/8πG
7.3 Age of the Universe
The age of the universe can be estimated from the Hubble
constant:
t0 = 1/H0
Where: H0 is expressed in kilometers per second per
megaparsec (km/s/Mpc).
8. Observational Techniques in Cosmology
8.1 Telescopes and Surveys
Various telescopes and observational surveys are essential for
studying cosmic structures and the universe's expansion:
Optical and Radio Telescopes: Observe galaxies and cosmic
structures.
Space Telescopes: Such as the Hubble Space Telescope, provide
insights into distant galaxies and the early universe. 161
Figure 5: Example of gravitational lensing
showing distorted images of distant galaxies.
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Cosmology
8.2 Gravitational Lensing
Gravitational lensing enables astronomers to study dark matter distribution and the curvature of space.
8.3 Supernova Observations
Type Ia supernovae serve as standard candles for measuring cosmic distances and understanding the
universe's expansion.
9. Future Directions in Cosmology
9.1 Upcoming Observatories
James Webb Space Telescope (JWST): Launched to study the universe in infrared wavelengths, revealing star
formation and the early universe.
Square Kilometer Array (SKA): An upcoming radio telescope that will enable high-resolution observations of
neutral hydrogen across the universe.
9.2 Simulation and Modeling
Advancements in computational astrophysics enhance our ability to simulate galaxy formation and evolution,
allowing for better understanding of the cosmos.
9.3 Exploring Dark Matter and Energy
Ongoing research aims to elucidate the roles of dark matter and dark energy, investigating their properties
through experiments and observations. 162
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Cosmology
10. Conclusion
Cosmology is a multifaceted field that
unravels the mysteries of the universe's
origin, structure, and evolution.
Through theoretical frameworks,
observational evidence, and advanced
technology, cosmologists continue to
deepen our understanding of the
cosmos and its fundamental
components.
163
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Astronomical Measurements
• Astronomical Observations and Measurements with Instruments
1. Introduction to Astronomical Measurements:
Astronomical measurements aim to quantify various properties of celestial objects, such as:
Distance Mass Motion Size Temperature Composition Magnetic Fields
Each of these properties can be measured using a variety of instruments, ranging from simple optical telescopes
to advanced space-based observatories.
2. Measuring Distances in Astronomy:
2.1 Parallax
Principle: Parallax is the apparent displacement of a star when viewed from different positions (usually opposite
sides of Earth's orbit). It allows us to measure distances to nearby stars.
𝑑 = 1/𝑝
Where: 𝑑: Distance in parsecs.𝑝p: Parallax angle in arcseconds.
Instruments:
Ground-based Telescopes: Used historically to measure stellar parallax for nearby stars.
ESA's Gaia Spacecraft: Measures parallax with unprecedented precision for billions of stars.
164
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Astronomical Measurements
Method: The telescope measures the angular position of a star relative to distant stars at different
times of the year, and the parallax angle is calculated.
2.2 Standard Candles
Principle: Certain astronomical objects, like Cepheid variables and Type Ia supernovae, have a known
intrinsic brightness (luminosity). By measuring their apparent brightness, their distance can be
determined using the inverse-square law of light:
𝑑 = (𝐿/4𝜋𝐵)
Where: 𝑑: Distance to the object.𝐿L: Luminosity.
𝐵: Observed brightness.
Instruments:
Optical Telescopes: Ground-based and space telescopes (like Hubble Space Telescope) equipped with
photometers or CCDs (charge-coupled devices) measure the apparent brightness of standard
candles.
Method: Astronomers observe periodic brightness changes in Cepheid variables or measure the peak
brightness of supernovae, which allows the calculation of distance based on their intrinsic luminosity.
165
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Astronomical Measurements
3. Measuring the Motion of Celestial Objects
3.1 Radial Velocity (Doppler Effect)
Principle: The radial velocity of an object, or its velocity along the line of sight, is measured through the
Doppler shift of its spectral lines. When an object moves toward the observer, its light shifts to shorter
(bluer) wavelengths (blueshift), and when it moves away, it shifts to longer (redder) wavelengths (redshift).
𝑣 = 𝑐(Δ𝜆/𝜆0)
Where: 𝑣: Radial velocity.
𝑐: Speed of light.
Δ𝜆: Shift in the wavelength of a spectral line.
𝜆0 : Rest wavelength.
Instruments:
Spectrographs: Devices attached to telescopes that disperse light into its component wavelengths.
Instruments like HARPS (High Accuracy Radial velocity Planet Searcher) on the European Southern
Observatory's 3.6m telescope measure the tiny Doppler shifts due to planet-star interactions.
Method: By examining the shift in spectral lines from a star, the velocity at which the star (and its planets)
is moving toward or away from Earth is determined.
166
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Astronomical Measurements
3.2 Proper Motion
Principle: Proper motion is the apparent motion of a star across the sky relative to distant background stars,
measured in arcseconds per year.
Instruments:
Astrometry Telescopes: The ESA Gaia mission precisely measures the positions and proper motions of over a
billion stars.
Ground-based Telescopes: Historical photographic plates and modern CCD-equipped telescopes measure the
change in a star's position over time.
Method: By measuring the star's position over many years, astronomers calculate how it moves across the sky.
Combined with radial velocity, this gives a full picture of the star's velocity in space.
4. Measuring the Size and Diameter of Celestial Objects
4.1 Angular Diameter:
Principle: The angular diameter 𝜃 of an object is the apparent size of the object in the sky. Using its known
distance, the physical size 𝐷 can be calculated:
𝐷 = 𝜃 × 𝑑
Where: 𝐷: Actual diameter of the object. 𝜃: Angular diameter in radians. 𝑑: Distance to the object.
167
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Astronomical Measurements
Instruments:
Telescopes with CCD Cameras: Measure the angular size of planets, stars, and galaxies.
Interferometers: The Very Large Telescope Interferometer (VLTI) uses multiple telescopes to resolve
the angular sizes of distant stars with extreme precision.
Method: The angular size of objects like planets or stars is observed through high-resolution
imaging, and their physical size is calculated using the known distance.
4.2 Lunar Occultation
Principle: A celestial object’s size can be determined when it passes behind the Moon (an
occultation). As the Moon covers or reveals the object, diffraction patterns provide insights into its
angular size.
Instruments:
Telescopes with High-Speed Cameras: These capture the diffraction pattern during occultation
events.
Method: Astronomers observe the time and diffraction patterns when the object is occulted, which
helps determine its angular size and hence its diameter.
168
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Astronomical Measurements
5. Measuring Mass in Astronomy
5.1 Binary Star Systems (Kepler’s Laws)
Principle: The masses of stars in a binary system can be calculated using Kepler's Third Law:
𝑃2 = [4𝜋2𝐺/(𝑀1 + 𝑀2)]𝑎3
Where: 𝑃: Orbital period. 𝑀1 & M2 : Masses of the stars. 𝑎: Semi-major axis of the orbit. G : Gravitational constant.
Instruments:
Radial Velocity Spectrographs: Measure the velocity shifts in binary star systems, allowing the calculation of orbital
parameters and mass.
Interferometers: Precisely measure the separation of binary stars, contributing to mass measurements.
Method: By measuring the orbital motion of stars in a binary system, astronomers can deduce the masses of the stars
involved.
5.2 Gravitational Lensing
Principle: Massive objects like galaxies bend the path of light from more distant objects due to their gravity. The amount of
bending provides insights into the mass of the lensing object.
Instruments:
Optical Telescopes: Instruments like the Hubble Space Telescope observe the lensing effect of distant galaxies.Ground-
based Telescopes: Large telescopes such as Keck and VLT are also used for gravitational lensing observations.
Method: Astronomers analyze the distortion of background galaxies to estimate the mass distribution of the foreground
galaxy or cluster acting as the lens. 169
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Astronomical Measurements
6. Measuring Composition of Celestial Objects
6.1 Spectroscopy
Principle: The composition of stars and planets can be determined by analyzing their spectra. Each element emits
or absorbs light at specific wavelengths, producing characteristic spectral lines.
Instruments:
Prism or Grating Spectrographs: These disperse light into its constituent wavelengths. For example, the Echelle
Spectrograph offers high-resolution spectral data for stars and galaxies.
Method: The light from a star or planet is passed through a spectrograph. The pattern of absorption or emission
lines reveals the chemical elements present, their abundance, and other properties like temperature and
pressure.
6.2 Polarimetry
Principle: Polarization of light provides insights into the scattering processes occurring in a star’s atmosphere or
interstellar dust clouds, as well as magnetic fields.
Instruments:
Polarimeters: Instruments attached to telescopes that measure the polarization of incoming light, used to study
stellar magnetic fields and interstellar dust.
Method: By measuring the degree and direction of polarization, astronomers gain information about the
scattering mechanisms and the presence of magnetic fields around stars and planets. 170
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Astronomical Measurements
7. Measuring Temperature of Celestial Objects
7.1 Wien’s Law (Blackbody Radiation)
Principle: The temperature of stars and planets can be deduced from their blackbody spectrum.
Wien’s Law relates the peak wavelength 𝜆max of the emission to the temperature 𝑇 of the object:
𝜆max = 𝑏/𝑇
Where: 𝑏 = 2.897 × 10−3 m K : Wien’s displacement constant. 𝑇: Temperature of the object.
𝜆max : Wavelength of peak emission.
Instruments:
Optical and Infrared Spectrographs: Measure the spectrum of stars and planets.Infrared Telescopes:
Telescopes like the James Webb Space Telescope (JWST) specialize in observing the infrared
spectrum, where cooler objects radiate more energy.
Method: The peak wavelength of the star's emitted light is measured, and Wien's law is applied to
determine its surface temperature.
171
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Astronomical Measurements
8. Measuring Magnetic Fields
8.1 Zeeman Effect
Principle: The splitting of spectral lines in the presence of a magnetic field is known as the Zeeman effect. The amount of splitting
provides a measure of the magnetic field's strength.
Instruments:
Spectropolarimeters:
Combine spectroscopy and polarimetry to measure the magnetic fields of stars, planets, and interstellar clouds.
Method: The light from a star is analyzed for the presence of split spectral lines, which directly relates to the strength of the
magnetic field surrounding the star.
9. Gravitational Waves
9.1 Laser Interferometry
Principle: Gravitational waves, predicted by Einstein’s General Theory of Relativity, are ripples in spacetime caused by massive
accelerating bodies such as merging black holes. These waves are detected by measuring tiny changes in the distance between
two objects.
Instruments:
LIGO (Laser Interferometer Gravitational-Wave Observatory): Uses laser interferometry to detect gravitational waves by
observing minuscule distortions in spacetime.
VIRGO: A similar detector, based in Europe, complements LIGO in detecting gravitational waves.
Method: Gravitational waves passing through Earth cause small changes in the length of the laser arms in LIGO. These changes are
detected and analyzed to understand the source of the waves, such as the merging of two black holes. 172
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Astronomical Measurements
10. Conclusion
Astronomical observations and measurements
are at the core of understanding the cosmos.
With the help of sophisticated instruments like
telescopes, spectrographs, interferometers,
and gravitational wave detectors, we can
probe the vast distances, immense energies,
and intricate processes that govern the
universe. As technology advances, these
measurements continue to become more
precise, opening new windows into the study
of the stars, galaxies, and the underlying
physics of space.
173
N.B: If any items are felt not be included well
as per syllabus as provided earlier, then
that part/parts can be clarified from
internet browsing.
Astronomy/Astrophysics Olympiad Camp
Thank You
174
Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh

More Related Content

PDF
Elementary Astronomical Calculations.pdf
PPTX
6.1 - Gravitational Force and fields
PPT
Newton, einstein, and gravity
PPT
Quantum mechanics
PPTX
Small amplitude oscillations
PPTX
PPTX
Vector atom model
PPTX
Michelson morley experiment
Elementary Astronomical Calculations.pdf
6.1 - Gravitational Force and fields
Newton, einstein, and gravity
Quantum mechanics
Small amplitude oscillations
Vector atom model
Michelson morley experiment

What's hot (20)

PPT
Agujeros negros
PPTX
Temporal Variations in Earth's Magnetic Field
PDF
Constellations
PPTX
PPT
Dark Matter And Energy
PPTX
Neutron Star
PPTX
Dark Matter Group AC 8
PPTX
Training of astronauts
PDF
Astrology (zodiac personalities)
PPT
Quasa rs
PPTX
Saturn
PPTX
Basics Of Astrophysics
KEY
IB Astrophysics - stellar radiation and types - Flippingphysics by nothingnerdy
PPT
Будова всесвIту
DOC
урок 8 планети земної групи
PPTX
.Physics presentation - Asteroids
PPT
Astrology
PPTX
Notes on our solar system
PPTX
Life cycle of a star
Agujeros negros
Temporal Variations in Earth's Magnetic Field
Constellations
Dark Matter And Energy
Neutron Star
Dark Matter Group AC 8
Training of astronauts
Astrology (zodiac personalities)
Quasa rs
Saturn
Basics Of Astrophysics
IB Astrophysics - stellar radiation and types - Flippingphysics by nothingnerdy
Будова всесвIту
урок 8 планети земної групи
.Physics presentation - Asteroids
Astrology
Notes on our solar system
Life cycle of a star
Ad

Similar to Astronomy or Astrophysics Olympiad Revision Guide (20)

PPTX
Applications Of Computer Science in Astronomy
PDF
Download full ebook of Discovering the Universe Neil F. Comins instant downlo...
PDF
eBook Discovering The Universe 11e Neil F. Comins.pdf
DOCX
Motions in the Nighttime Sky and the Celestial SphereBackground .docx
PPTX
Astronomy NC 2014
PDF
An Introduction To Astrophysics 2nd Edition Baidyanath Basu Tanuka Chattopadhyay
PDF
Solutions Manual to accompany an Introduction to Modern Astrophysics 2nd 9780...
DOCX
Astronomy.docx12345678910111213141516171
PDF
The Trans-Neptunian Solar System 1st Edition Dina Prialnik
PPTX
IA 2019 2a
PDF
Astronomy Branches to Draft a Great Science Assignment
PDF
Observational evidence from supernovae for an accelerating universe and a cos...
PDF
Astronomy Astrophysics is Easy.pdf
PDF
Od report team_3_2019
PPTX
Astronomy 1 Notes
PDF
Human Vision And The Night Sky Hot To Improve Your Observing Skills 3rd Editi...
PDF
S382 Introduction To Astrophysics And Cosmology Andrew Norton
PPTX
observational astronomy and astronomers sa.pptx
PDF
Light pollution
PPT
Soar system
Applications Of Computer Science in Astronomy
Download full ebook of Discovering the Universe Neil F. Comins instant downlo...
eBook Discovering The Universe 11e Neil F. Comins.pdf
Motions in the Nighttime Sky and the Celestial SphereBackground .docx
Astronomy NC 2014
An Introduction To Astrophysics 2nd Edition Baidyanath Basu Tanuka Chattopadhyay
Solutions Manual to accompany an Introduction to Modern Astrophysics 2nd 9780...
Astronomy.docx12345678910111213141516171
The Trans-Neptunian Solar System 1st Edition Dina Prialnik
IA 2019 2a
Astronomy Branches to Draft a Great Science Assignment
Observational evidence from supernovae for an accelerating universe and a cos...
Astronomy Astrophysics is Easy.pdf
Od report team_3_2019
Astronomy 1 Notes
Human Vision And The Night Sky Hot To Improve Your Observing Skills 3rd Editi...
S382 Introduction To Astrophysics And Cosmology Andrew Norton
observational astronomy and astronomers sa.pptx
Light pollution
Soar system
Ad

More from BuetTutor (6)

PDF
C-H Bond Angle and Bond Length in detailed in Bengali
PDF
Ḍiphārēnaśiẏāla samīkaraṇa: Paribartanēra saṅgīta ō ēka ajānā kāhini 55 / 5,0...
PDF
Stengthening Governance by Science and Technology
PDF
Causes of Aging and Preventive Strategies
PDF
Microgreen: A Tiny Plant with Superfood Potential
PDF
Astronomical Problems and Solutions for IAO (Celestial Mechanics).pdf
C-H Bond Angle and Bond Length in detailed in Bengali
Ḍiphārēnaśiẏāla samīkaraṇa: Paribartanēra saṅgīta ō ēka ajānā kāhini 55 / 5,0...
Stengthening Governance by Science and Technology
Causes of Aging and Preventive Strategies
Microgreen: A Tiny Plant with Superfood Potential
Astronomical Problems and Solutions for IAO (Celestial Mechanics).pdf

Recently uploaded (20)

PPTX
Final Presentation General Medicine 03-08-2024.pptx
PPTX
Pharmacology of Heart Failure /Pharmacotherapy of CHF
PPTX
Institutional Correction lecture only . . .
PDF
Black Hat USA 2025 - Micro ICS Summit - ICS/OT Threat Landscape
PDF
O7-L3 Supply Chain Operations - ICLT Program
PDF
Abdominal Access Techniques with Prof. Dr. R K Mishra
PDF
102 student loan defaulters named and shamed – Is someone you know on the list?
PDF
RMMM.pdf make it easy to upload and study
PDF
3rd Neelam Sanjeevareddy Memorial Lecture.pdf
PDF
VCE English Exam - Section C Student Revision Booklet
PDF
Computing-Curriculum for Schools in Ghana
PDF
Saundersa Comprehensive Review for the NCLEX-RN Examination.pdf
PDF
STATICS OF THE RIGID BODIES Hibbelers.pdf
PDF
The Lost Whites of Pakistan by Jahanzaib Mughal.pdf
PDF
Complications of Minimal Access Surgery at WLH
PDF
Microbial disease of the cardiovascular and lymphatic systems
PPTX
Cell Types and Its function , kingdom of life
PDF
Module 4: Burden of Disease Tutorial Slides S2 2025
PPTX
human mycosis Human fungal infections are called human mycosis..pptx
PDF
GENETICS IN BIOLOGY IN SECONDARY LEVEL FORM 3
Final Presentation General Medicine 03-08-2024.pptx
Pharmacology of Heart Failure /Pharmacotherapy of CHF
Institutional Correction lecture only . . .
Black Hat USA 2025 - Micro ICS Summit - ICS/OT Threat Landscape
O7-L3 Supply Chain Operations - ICLT Program
Abdominal Access Techniques with Prof. Dr. R K Mishra
102 student loan defaulters named and shamed – Is someone you know on the list?
RMMM.pdf make it easy to upload and study
3rd Neelam Sanjeevareddy Memorial Lecture.pdf
VCE English Exam - Section C Student Revision Booklet
Computing-Curriculum for Schools in Ghana
Saundersa Comprehensive Review for the NCLEX-RN Examination.pdf
STATICS OF THE RIGID BODIES Hibbelers.pdf
The Lost Whites of Pakistan by Jahanzaib Mughal.pdf
Complications of Minimal Access Surgery at WLH
Microbial disease of the cardiovascular and lymphatic systems
Cell Types and Its function , kingdom of life
Module 4: Burden of Disease Tutorial Slides S2 2025
human mycosis Human fungal infections are called human mycosis..pptx
GENETICS IN BIOLOGY IN SECONDARY LEVEL FORM 3

Astronomy or Astrophysics Olympiad Revision Guide

  • 1. Welcome to Astronomy/Astrophysics Olympiad Camp Sukalyan Bachhar B.Sc.Engg.(Mech.) & M.Sc.Engg.(Mech.), BUET Senior Curator National Museum of Science & Technology Ministry of Science & Technology Agargaon, Sher-E-Bangla Nagar, Dhaka-1207. Website: www.nmst.gov.bd & Member, Bangladesh Astronomical Association  Short bio-data:  First Class Graduate in Mechanical Engineering from BUET [1993].  Master of Science in Mechanical Engineering from BUET [1998].  Field of specialization  Fluid Mechanics.  Field of personal interest  Astrophysics.  Field of real life activity  Popularization of Science & Technology from1995.  Experienced in supervising for multiple scientific or research projects.  Habituated as science speaker.  17th BCS qualified.  Member of Various Science & Engineering Societies 1 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 2. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp মহাবিশ্বে মহাকাশ্বে মহাকাল-মাশ্বে, আবম মানি একাকী ভ্রবম বিস্মশ্ব়ে …. 2 In the universe, in space, in time, I human travel alone in wonder …. Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 3. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp - Syllabus Theoretical and Practical Syllabus Basic Astrophysics ➢Celestial Mechanics ➢Newton’s Laws of Gravitation, Kepler’s Laws For Circular And Non-circular Orbits, Roche Limit, Barycentre, 2-body Problem, Lagrange Points. ➢Electromagnetic Theory & Quantum Physics ➢Electromagnetic Spectrum, Radiation Laws, Blackbody Radiation. ➢Thermodynamics ➢Thermodynamic Equilibrium, Ideal Gas, Energy Transfer. ➢Spectroscopy and Atomic Physics ➢Absorption, Emission, Scattering, Spectra of Celestial Objects, Doppler Effect, Line Formations, Continuum Spectra, Splitting And Broadening of Spectral Lines, Polarization. ➢Nuclear Physics ➢Basic Concepts Including Structure of An Atom, Mass Defect And Binding Energy Radioactivity, Neutrinos (Q). 3 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 4. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp - Syllabus Theoretical and Practical Syllabus Coordinates and Times ➢Celestial Sphere ➢Spherical Trigonometry, Celestial Coordinates And Their Applications, Equinox And Solstice, Circumpolar Stars, Constellations And Zodiac. ➢Concept of Time ➢Solar Time, Sidereal Time, Julian Date, Heliocentric Julian Date, Time Zone, Universal Time, Local Mean Time, Different Definitions of “Year”, Equation of Time Solar System ➢The Sun ➢Solar Structure, Solar Surface Activities, Solar Rotation, Solar Radiation And Solar Constant, Solar Neutrinos (Q), Sun-earth ➢Relations, Role of Magnetic Fields (Q), Solar Wind And Radiation Pressure, Heliosphere (Q), Magnetosphere (Q). ➢The Solar System ➢Earth-moon System, Precession, Nutation, Libration, Formation And Evolution of The Solar System (Q), Structure And Components of The Solar System (Q), Structure And Orbits of The Solar System Objects, Sidereal And Synodic Periods, Retrograde Motion, Outer Reaches of The Solar System (Q), Eclipse & Transit. 4 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 5. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp - Syllabus Theoretical and Practical Syllabus Space Exploration ➢ Satellite Trajectories And Transfers, Human Exploration of The Solar System (Q), Planetary Missions (Q), Sling-shot Effect of Gravity, Space-based Instruments (Q). ➢ Phenomena ➢ Tides, Seasons, Eclipses, Aurorae (Q), Meteor Showers. Stars ➢ Stellar Properties ➢ Methods of Distance Determination, Radiation, Luminosity And Magnitude, Color Indices And Temperature, Determination of Radii And Masses, Stellar Motion, Irregular And Regular Stellar Variabilities – Broad Classification & Properties, Cepheids & Period-luminosity Relation, Physics of Pulsation (Q). ➢ Stellar Interior and Atmospheres ➢ Stellar Equilibrium, Stellar Nucleosynthesis, Energy Transportation (Q), Boundary Conditions, Stellar Atmospheres And Atmospheric Spectra. ➢ Stellar Evolution ➢ Stellar Formation, Hertzsprung-Russell Diagram, Pre-main Sequence, Main Sequence, Post-main Sequence Stars, Supernovae, Planetary Nebulae, End States of Stars. 5 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 6. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp - Syllabus Theoretical and Practical Syllabus Stellar Systems ➢Binary Star Systems ➢Different Types of Binary Stars, Mass Determination In Binary Star Systems, Light And Radial Velocity Curves of Eclipsing Binary Systems, Doppler Shifts In Binary Systems, Interacting Binaries, Peculiar Binary Systems. ➢ Exoplanets ➢ Techniques Used to Detect Exoplanets. ➢Star Clusters ➢Classification And Structure, Mass, Age, Luminosity And Distance Determination. ➢Milky Way Galaxy ➢Structure And Composition, Rotation, Satellites of the Milky Way (Q). ➢Interstellar Medium ➢Gas (Q), Dust (Q), Hii Regions, 21cm Radiation, Nebulae (Q), Interstellar Absorption, Dispersion Measure, Faraday Rotation. ➢Galaxies ➢Classifications Based on Structure, Composition And Activity, Mass, Luminosity And Distance Determination, Rotation Curves. ➢Accretion Processes ➢Basic Concepts (Spherical And Disc Accretion) (Q), Eddington Luminosity. 6 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 7. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp - Syllabus Theoretical and Practical Syllabus Cosmology ➢ Elementary Cosmology ➢ Expanding Universe And Hubble’s Law, Cluster of Galaxies, Dark Matter, Dark Energy (Q), Gravitational Lensing, Cosmic Microwave Background Radiation, Big Bang (Q), Alternative Models of The Universe (Q), Large Scale Structure (Q), Distance Measurement At A Cosmological Scale, Cosmological Redshift. Instrumentation and Space Technologies ➢Multi-wavelength Astronomy ➢Observations In Radio, Microwave, Infrared, Visible, Ultraviolet, X-ray, And Gamma-ray Wavelength Bands, Earth’s Atmospheric Effects. ➢Instrumentation ➢Telescopes And Detectors (E.G. Charge-coupled Devices, Photometers, Spectrographs), Magnification, Focal Length, Focal Ratio, Resolving And Light-gathering Powers of Telescopes, Geometric Model of Two Element Interferometer, Aperture Synthesis, Adaptive Optics, Photometry, Astrometry. 7 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 8. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp - Syllabus Theoretical and Practical Syllabus Practical Part This part consists of 2 sections: observations and data analysis sections. The theoretical part of the syllabus provides the basis for all problems in the practical part. The observations section focuses on the contestant’s experience in 1. Naked-eye observations. 2. Usage of sky maps and catalogues (note: any stars referred to by name rather than Bayer designation or catalogue number must be on the list of IAU-approved star names; knowledge of the whole list is not required). 3. Application of coordinate systems in the sky, magnitude estimation, estimation of angular separation 4. Usage of basic astronomical instruments-telescopes and various detectors for observations but enough instructions must be provided to the contestants. Observational objects may be from real sources in the sky or imitated sources in the laboratory. Computer simulations may be used in the problems, but sufficient instructions must be provided to the contestants. The data analysis section focuses on the calculation and analysis of the astronomical data provided in the problems. Additional requirements are as follows: 1. Proper identification of error sources, calculation of errors, and estimation of their influence on the final results. 2. Proper use of graph papers with different scales, e.g., polar and logarithmic papers. Transformation of the data to get a linear plot and find the “Best Fit” line approximately. 3. Basic statistical analysis of the observational data. 4. Knowledge of the most common experimental techniques for measuring physical quantities mentioned in Part A. 8 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 9. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics • 01. Newton’s Laws of Motion (Translational and Rotational) Newton’s Laws of motion describe the relationship between a body and the forces acting upon it, along with the body's motion in response to these forces. They are applicable to both translational and rotational motion, but with different expressions for the variables involved. • Newton’s First Law (Law of Inertia) • (a) Translational Motion: Statement: A body remains at rest, or moves with constant velocity unless acted upon by an external force. Mathematical form: ∑F = 0 (at equilibrium) Where: F = external force (vector) The object remains in a state of rest or uniform motion if no external force is applied. • Rotational Motion: Statement: A rigid body continues in a state of rest or uniform rotational motion about a fixed axis unless acted upon by an external torque. Mathematical form: ∑τ = 0 (at rotational equilibrium) Where: τ = external torque. 9 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 10. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics • Newton’s Second Law (Law of Acceleration) • Translational Motion: Statement: The net force acting on an object is equal to the mass of the object multiplied by its acceleration. Mathematical form: F = ma *[ Modern form: F = d/dt(p) ; where: Momentum, p = ma ] Where: F = net force (vector) m = mass of the object a = acceleration (vector) • Rotational Motion: Statement: The net torque acting on a rigid body is equal to the moment of inertia of the body multiplied by its angular acceleration. Mathematical form: τ = Iα *[ Modern form: τ = d/dt(L) ; where: Angular momentum, L = r × p ] Where: τ = net torque I = moment of inertia α = angular acceleration 10 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 11. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics • Newton’s Third Law (Action and Reaction) • Translational Motion: Statement: For every action, there is an equal and opposite reaction. Mathematical form: F12 = − F21 Where: F12 is the force exerted by object 1 on object 2. F21 is the equal and opposite force exerted by object 2 on object 1. • Rotational Motion: Statement: For every torque exerted by one object on another, there is an equal and opposite torque exerted by the second object on the first. Mathematical form: τ12 = − τ21 Where: τ12 is the torque exerted by object 1 on object 2. τ21 is the equal and opposite torque exerted by object 2 on object 1. 11 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 12. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics • Celestial mechanics is a branch of physics that deals with the motions of celestial objects like planets, stars, moons, and artificial satellites. Olympiad problems in celestial mechanics often require a solid understanding of gravitational forces, orbits, and energy principles. Here's a comprehensive guide with detailed equations and explanations: • 02. Newton’s Law of Universal Gravitation: This is the fundamental force governing the motion of all celestial bodies: 𝐹 = 𝐺𝑚1𝑚2/𝑟2 Where: 𝐹 is the gravitational force. 𝐺 is the gravitational constant (6.67430×10−11 Nm2/kg2 . 𝑚1 and 𝑚2 are the masses of the two objects. 𝑟 is the distance between the centers of the two masses. This law forms the foundation of celestial mechanics and is crucial for understanding how celestial bodies interact. 12 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 13. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics • 03. Newton’s Second Law and Orbital Motion: Newton's second law, combined with the gravitational force, gives the basis for the motion of objects in orbits. The gravitational force acts as the centripetal force for objects in orbit: 𝐹 = 𝑚𝑣2/𝑟 Setting this equal to the gravitational force: 𝐺𝑀𝑚/𝑟2 = 𝑚𝑣2/r This simplifies to: 𝑣 = (𝐺𝑀/𝑟) Where: 𝑣 is the orbital velocity. M is the mass of the central body (e.g., a planet or the Sun). 𝑟 is the distance between the orbiting object and the center of the central body. Orbital Period for Circular Orbits: For an object in a circular orbit, the orbital period 𝑇 (the time to complete one full orbit) is related to the radius 𝑟 and the central mass 𝑀 by: 𝑇=2𝜋(𝑟3/𝐺𝑀) This comes from Kepler’s Third Law (discussed in more detail below). 13 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 14. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics •04. Kepler’s Laws of Planetary Motion: •Kepler's First Law: Law of Ellipses Planets move in elliptical orbits with the Sun at one focus. An ellipse is characterized by its semi-major axis 𝑎a and eccentricity 𝑒. The general equation of an ellipse in polar coordinates (with the Sun at the focus) is: 𝑟 = 𝑎(1 − 𝑒2)/(1 + 𝑒cos𝜃) Where: 𝑟 is the distance from the Sun. 𝑎 is the semi-major axis. e is the eccentricity. 𝜃 is the true anomaly, the angle between the position of the planet and the major axis. •Kepler's Second Law: Law of Equal Areas A line connecting a planet to the Sun sweeps out equal areas in equal time intervals, implying that planets move faster when they are closer to the Sun (perihelion) and slower when they are farther away (aphelion). Areal velocity 𝑑𝐴/𝑑𝑡 is constant: 𝑑𝐴/𝑑𝑡 = (1/2)𝑟2𝑑𝜃/dt = constant 14 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 15. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics • Kepler's Third Law: Law of Harmonies The square of the orbital period 𝑇 is proportional to the cube of the semi-major axis 𝑎 of the orbit: 𝑇2 ∝ 𝑎3 For an object orbiting a star like the Sun: 𝑇2 = (4𝜋2/𝐺𝑀⊙)𝑎3 Where: 𝑇 is the orbital period.𝑎a is the semi-major axis. 𝑀⊙ is the mass of the Sun (or any central object for a general two-body system). • 05. Escape Velocity: • The escape velocity is the minimum velocity needed to escape from the gravitational influence of a celestial body without any further propulsion. It is derived from equating kinetic energy with gravitational potential energy: Vesc = (2𝐺𝑀/r ) Where: Vesc is the escape velocity. M is the mass of the celestial body (e.g., Earth, Moon). r is the distance from the center of the body. 15 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 16. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics •06. Orbital Energy: The total mechanical energy of an object in orbit is the sum of its kinetic and potential energies: 𝐸 = (1/2)𝑚𝑣2 − 𝐺𝑀𝑚/𝑟 Using 𝑣 = (𝐺𝑀/𝑟) for circular orbits, the total energy per unit mass becomes: 𝐸 = − 𝐺𝑀/2𝑟 This negative energy indicates that the object is in a bound orbit (circular or elliptical). If the total energy is zero or positive, the orbit is parabolic or hyperbolic, respectively (unbound orbit). •Specific Orbital Energy for Elliptical Orbits For an elliptical orbit, the total specific energy (energy per unit mass) is: 𝜖 = − 𝐺𝑀/2𝑎 Where: a is the semi-major axis of the elliptical orbit. 16 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 17. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics • 07. Vis-Viva Equation (also referred to as orbital-energy-invariance law or Burgas formula): The Vis-Viva equation relates the speed of an orbiting object at any point in its orbit to its distance from the central body and the semi-major axis (arising from conservation of mechanical energy) : 𝑣 = [𝐺𝑀(2/𝑟 − 1/𝑎)]​ Where: 𝑣 is the speed of the object at a distance 𝑟r from the central body. 𝑎 is the semi-major axis. 𝑟 is the current distance from the central body. This equation is useful for both elliptical and circular orbits, as well as determining velocities at periapsis and apoapsis. 17 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 18. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics • 08. Hohmann Transfer Orbit: A Hohmann transfer orbit is the most efficient way to transfer between two circular orbits of different radii. It uses two velocity changes (burns): First Burn: At the periapsis of the transfer orbit (to leave the initial circular orbit): Δ𝑣1 = (𝐺𝑀/𝑟1)( ((2𝑟2/(𝑟1 + 𝑟2)) − 1) Second Burn: At the apoapsis of the transfer orbit (to enter the final circular orbit): Δ𝑣2 = (𝐺𝑀/𝑟2) (1 −  (2𝑟1/(𝑟1 + 𝑟2) ) Where: 𝑟1 is the radius of the initial orbit. 𝑟2 is the radius of the final orbit. 18 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 19. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics • 09. Geostationary Orbits A geostationary orbit is one in which a satellite remains fixed relative to the surface of the Earth. For such an orbit, the orbital period is 24 hours. The radius of a geostationary orbit is: rgeo = (GMT2/4π2)1/3 Where: T = 86400 seconds (24 hours). M is the mass of the Earth. • 10. Lagrange Points Lagrange points are positions in a two-body system (like the Earth and Moon) where the gravitational forces of the two large bodies and the centrifugal force balance, allowing an object to remain in a stable position relative to the two bodies. There are five Lagrange points L1, L2, L3, L4, L5 with L1, L2, and L3 along the line connecting the two bodies. L4 and L5 form equilateral triangles with the two bodies and are stable points. 19 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 20. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics •11. Tsiolkovsky Rocket Equation: For problems involving the motion of rockets, the Tsiolkovsky rocket equation provides a way to calculate the change in velocity (Δv) of a rocket: Δv = veln(m0/mf Where: ve is the effective exhaust velocity. m0 is the initial mass of the rocket (including fuel). mf is the final mass of the rocket (after fuel is burnt). ln is the natural logarithm. 20 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 21. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics • 12. Tidal Force: •Definition of Tidal Force: Tidal force is the differential gravitational force exerted by one massive body (like the Moon or Sun) on different parts of another body (like the Earth). This differential force arises because the gravitational attraction is stronger on the side of the body closer to the attracting object and weaker on the far side. The resulting difference causes the affected body to stretch, producing tidal effects, such as ocean tides on Earth. •Derivation of the Tidal Force Equation: •Step 1: Gravitational Force Between Two Bodies The gravitational force between two masses MMM (the mass of the attracting body) and mmm (the mass of the affected body or a small point mass on it) at a distance rrr from each other is given by Newton's law of gravitation: F = GMm/r2 Where: F = gravitational force G = gravitational constant (6.674×10−11 N⋅m2/kg2) M = mass of the attracting body (e.g., Moon) m = mass of the affected body or object (e.g., Earth, or a small point on Earth's surface) r = distance between the centers of the two bodies 21 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 22. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics •Step 2: Gravitational Force at Different Points on the Affected Body The tidal force results from the difference in the gravitational force felt at different points on the affected body. Let's consider two points: One on the side of the affected body closest to the attracting body (the "near side") One on the side farthest from the attracting body (the "far side"). For a body of radius RRR, the distance from the attracting body to these two points will be: Near side: r−R Far side: r+R •Step 3: Gravitational Force on the Near and Far Sides The gravitational force at the near side is: Fnear = GMm/(r−R)2 The gravitational force at the far side is: Ffar = GMm/(r+R)2 •Step 4: Difference in Forces (Tidal Force) The tidal force Ftidal is the difference between the forces at the near side and the far side: Ftidal = Fnear - Ffar This expression is complicated, but for R≪r (i.e., when the size of the affected body is much smaller than the distance between the two bodies), we can use a Taylor expansion to approximate this difference. 22 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 23. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics •Step 5: Approximation Using Taylor Expansion For small R compared to r, the following approximation holds: Ftidal ≈ 2GMmR/r3 Final Tidal Force Equation: Ftidal ≈ 2GMmR/r3 Where: Ftidal = tidal force G = gravitational constant M = mass of the attracting body (e.g., Moon) m = mass of the affected body (or a point on it) R = radius of the affected body r = distance between the centers of the two bodies Key Insights: The tidal force is proportional to the size of the affected body R, and it decreases rapidly with the cube of the distance r between the two bodies. This is why tidal forces are much stronger for objects that are close together, even if they are relatively small. 23 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 24. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics • 13. Roche Limit: The Roche limit is the minimum distance to which a celestial body (like a moon or a satellite) can approach a more massive body (like a planet) without being torn apart by tidal forces. When the tidal forces (which stretch the object) exceed the object's own gravitational self-attraction (which holds it together), the object will disintegrate. The Roche limit is particularly relevant when studying planetary rings, moons, and tidal forces within celestial systems. Equation for the Roche Limit The Roche limit d depends on the radii and densities of the two bodies involved. For a fluid satellite (a body that can deform easily due to tidal forces) orbiting a planet, the Roche limit is given by: 𝑑 = 𝑅𝑝⋅2.44⋅(𝜌p/𝜌𝑠)1/3 Where: 𝑑 is the Roche limit (the minimum orbital distance). 𝑅𝑝 is the radius of the planet (the larger object). 𝜌p​ is the density of the planet. 𝜌𝑠 is the density of the satellite (the smaller object). This equation is specifically for fluid bodies. For rigid bodies, the constant 2.442.44 is reduced to around 1.26. 24 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 25. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics Explanation of the Terms: • Tidal forces increase as the satellite gets closer to the planet, and they act to stretch the satellite. • Gravitational self-attraction holds the satellite together. If tidal forces surpass the satellite’s self- gravity, the satellite breaks apart. For rocky bodies (e.g., moons or asteroids), the Roche limit is farther out than for fluid bodies because rocky bodies are more resistant to tidal forces. Picture Description: Imagine a planet with a moon. The Roche limit is the point where the gravitational pull of the planet on the near side of the moon is significantly stronger than the pull on the far side, creating a strong tidal effect. If the moon crosses this limit, the differential forces become so extreme that the moon would be pulled apart, forming rings around the planet (similar to Saturn’s rings). Let me now create an illustration of this concept. Here is the illustration of the Roche limit, showing how a moon gets torn apart by tidal forces when it crosses this critical distance near a planet. The diagram highlights tidal forces, the planet's gravitational pull, and the formation of rings as the moon breaks apart. 25
  • 26. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics • 14. Barycentre: The barycenter is the center of mass of two or more bodies that are in orbit due to mutual gravitational attraction. It is the point around which both bodies orbit, and its position depends on their masses. Barycenter Equation: For two objects with masses 𝑀1 and 𝑀2 separated by a distance 𝑑, the location of the barycenter relative to the center of the first mass (𝑀1) is given by the formula: 𝑟1 =( 𝑀2/(𝑀1 + 𝑀2)) 𝑑 Where: 𝑟1 is the distance of mass 𝑀1 from the barycenter. 𝑀1 and 𝑀2 are the masses of the two bodies. d is the distance between the two bodies. Similarly, the distance of the second mass 𝑀2​ from the barycenter is: 𝑟2 =( 𝑀1/(𝑀1 + 𝑀2)) 𝑑 26 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 27. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics • Key Points: The barycenter is closer to the more massive body. If 𝑀1 = 𝑀2 , the barycenter lies exactly in the middle of the two bodies. If one object is much more massive than the other (e.g., a star and a planet), the barycenter may lie inside the larger body. • Figure Description Let me generate a figure that represents two masses orbiting their barycenter, with labeled distances from the barycenter and arrows showing their motion. Here is the illustration showing the barycenter in a two-body system, with both masses orbiting around the central barycenter point. The figure shows the relative distances from the barycenter to the two masses, 𝑟1 and 𝑟2 , and the total distance 𝑑 between them. The larger mass (M1) is closer to the barycenter, as expected. 27 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 28. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics • 15. The 2-Body Problem: An Overview: The 2-body problem is a classical problem in mechanics and astrophysics that seeks to describe the motion of two bodies interacting under their mutual gravitational force. The problem is based on Newton's laws of motion and Newton's law of universal gravitation. Given two masses, m1 and m2, the gravitational force between them is proportional to the product of their masses and inversely proportional to the square of the distance between them. Equations of Motion: Let’s define the position vectors of the two masses as r1(t) and r2(t). The vector distance between the two bodies is: r(t) = r1(t) - r2(t) The magnitude of this vector is the distance between the two masses: r = ∣r(t)∣ The gravitational force on mass m1 due to m2 is: F12 = −(Gm1m2/r2) r^ Where G is the gravitational constant, and r^ is the unit vector pointing from mass m1 to m2. 28 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 29. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Mechanics Newton's second law gives the following system of differential equations for the two masses: m1d2r1/dt2 = − (Gm1m2/r3)(r1 − r2) m2d2r2/dt2 = − (Gm1m2/r3)(r2 − r1) Center of Mass and Reduced Mass It’s convenient to solve the problem by transforming it into a center-of-mass (COM) reference frame. The position of the center of mass RCM is given by: RCM = (m1r1 + m2r2 )/(m1 + m2) Defining the reduced mass μ: μ = m1m2 /(m1 + m2) This allows us to reduce the 2-body problem to a single-body problem where one mass μmuμ moves under the influence of the central force. The equation of motion for the relative position vector r is: μdr2/dt2 = − (Gm1m2/r2) r^ This equation describes the motion of r(t), and its solution depends on the initial conditions. The resulting motion is generally elliptical, as described by Kepler's laws of planetary motion. 29 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 30. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Electromagnetic Theory • Electromagnetic theory explains how electric and magnetic fields are related and how they interact to form electromagnetic waves. The foundation of this theory comes from Maxwell’s Equations, which describe how these fields behave and how they influence each other. •Key Concepts 1. Electric Field (𝐸): An electric field is created by electric charges. It exerts a force on other electric charges. The strength of the electric field from a point charge 𝑄 is given by: 𝐸 = 𝑘𝑄/𝑟2 Where: 𝑘 = 9 × 109 N⋅m2/C2 , 𝑄 is the charge, and 𝑟 is the distance from the charge. 2. Magnetic Field (𝐵B): A magnetic field is created by moving charges (like electric currents). It exerts forces on moving charges or other magnets. The magnetic field around a straight current-carrying wire is: 𝐵 = 𝜇0𝐼/2𝜋𝑟 Where: 𝜇0 = 4𝜋 × 10−7 T⋅m/A, 𝐼 is the current, and 𝑟 is the distance from the wire. 30 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 31. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Electromagnetic Theory 3. Electromagnetic Waves: Electromagnetic waves are created when electric and magnetic fields change with time. These waves move at the speed of light 𝑐 = 3 × 108 m/s. Light, radio waves, and X-rays are examples of electromagnetic waves. Maxwell’s Equations (Simplified): Maxwell's Equations describe how electric and magnetic fields work together. 1. Gauss's Law for Electricity: Electric charges produce electric fields. ∮𝐸⋅𝑑𝐴 = 𝑄/𝜖0 𝑄 is the total charge, and 𝜖0 is the permittivity of free space. 2. Gauss's Law for Magnetism: Magnetic field lines form closed loops; there are no isolated magnetic poles (no "magnetic charges"). ∮𝐵⋅𝑑𝐴 = 0 3. Faraday’s Law of Induction: A changing magnetic field creates an electric field. ∮𝐸⋅𝑑𝑙 = −𝑑/𝑑𝑡[∫𝐵⋅𝑑𝐴] This principle is the basis for electric generators. 31 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 32. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Electromagnetic Theory 4. Ampère’s Law (with Maxwell's Correction): A current or a changing electric field creates a magnetic field. ∮𝐵⋅𝑑𝑙 = μ0 𝐼 + μ0 𝜖0 𝑑/𝑑𝑡[∫𝐸⋅𝑑𝐴] μ0 is the permeability of free space. Electromagnetic Waves: Electromagnetic waves consist of oscillating electric and magnetic fields. These fields are perpendicular to each other and to the direction the wave is moving. Electromagnetic waves travel at the speed of light, 𝑐, which can be calculated from the properties of electric and magnetic fields: 𝑐 = 1/(μ0𝜖0 ) Where: μ0 is the permeability of free space and 𝜖0 is the permittivity of free space. Key Equations Summary: 1. Electric Field from a Charge( From Coulomb’s law): 𝐸 = 𝑘𝑄/𝑟2 Where, 𝑘 is Coulomb's constant, 𝑄 is the charge, and 𝑟 is the distance. 32 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 33. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Electromagnetic Theory 2. Magnetic Field from a Current: 𝐵 = 𝜇0𝐼/2𝜋𝑟 Where: 𝜇0 is the permeability of free space, 𝐼 is the current, and 𝑟 is the distance from the current. 3. Speed of Light: 𝑐 = 1/(𝜇0𝜖0) Where: 𝑐 is the speed of light, 𝜇0 is the permeability of free space, and 𝜖0 is the permittivity of free space. Conclusion: Maxwell’s equations show how electric and magnetic fields are connected. When these fields change, they can create electromagnetic waves, which include light, radio waves, and X-rays. Understanding these concepts helps explain many modern technologies like radios, cell phones, and even how we see light! 33 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 34. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Quantum Physics • Quantum physics is the branch of science that deals with the behavior of particles at very small scales, such as atoms and subatomic particles like electrons and photons. It challenges our everyday understanding of how things work because particles at this scale behave very differently from the objects we see in our daily lives. • Key Concepts in Quantum Physics 1. Quantization of Energy: Energy is not continuous but comes in small, discrete packets called quanta. For example, light energy is carried by particles called photons. The energy of each photon is proportional to its frequency 𝑓, given by the formula: 𝐸 = ℎ𝑓 Where: 𝐸 is the energy of the photon, ℎ is Planck’s constant (6.626 × 10−34 J⋅s), and 𝑓 is the frequency of the light. 2. Wave-Particle Duality: Particles, like electrons, can behave as both particles and waves. For instance, light can act as a particle (photon) in certain experiments, but it also behaves like a wave, exhibiting interference and diffraction. The wavelength 𝜆 of a particle is related to its momentum 𝑝 by de Broglie’s equation: p = ℎ/λ Where: ℎ is Planck's constant, and 𝑝p is the particle’s momentum. 34 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 35. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Quantum Physics 3. Uncertainty Principle: Introduced by Werner Heisenberg, it states that you cannot simultaneously know the exact position and momentum of a particle. The more precisely you know a particle's position 𝑥, the less precisely you can know its momentum 𝑝, and vice versa. This relationship is given by: Δ𝑥⋅Δ𝑝 ≥ ℎ/4𝜋 Where: Δ𝑥 is the uncertainty in position, Δ𝑝 is the uncertainty in momentum, and ℎ is Planck’s constant. 4. The Schrödinger Equation: In quantum physics, the behavior of particles is described by a wave function 𝜓, which contains all the information about the particle. The Schrödinger equation governs how this wave function evolves over time. For a particle in one dimension, it is written as: 𝑖ℏ∂𝜓/∂ 𝑡= −(ℏ2/2𝑚)∂2𝜓/∂𝑥2 + 𝑉(𝑥)𝜓 Where: 𝑖 is the imaginary unit, ℏ is the reduced Planck’s constant (ℏ = ℎ/2𝜋), 𝑚 is the particle’s mass, and 𝑉(𝑥) is the potential energy. 35 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 36. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Quantum Physics 5. Superposition: In quantum physics, particles can exist in multiple states at the same time, a concept called superposition. For example, an electron in an atom can be in a superposition of being in two different energy levels. Only when you measure the electron does it “choose” one state, which leads to the idea of wave function collapse. 6. Quantum Entanglement: When two particles become entangled, the state of one particle is directly related to the state of the other, no matter how far apart they are. If you measure one entangled particle, the state of the other is instantly determined, even if they are light-years apart. This phenomenon puzzled Einstein, who famously called it "spooky action at a distance.“ Key Equations in Quantum Physics: 1. Planck's Equation (Energy of a Photon): 𝐸 = ℎ𝑓 E = energy of the photon, ℎ = Planck's constant, 𝑓 = frequency of the wave. 2. de Broglie Wavelength (Wave-Particle Duality): 𝜆 = ℎ/𝑝 λ = wavelength, ℎ = Planck’s constant, 𝑝 = momentum of the particle. 36 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 37. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Quantum Physics 3. Heisenberg's Uncertainty Principle: Δ𝑥⋅Δ𝑝 ≥ ℎ/4𝜋 Δx = uncertainty in position, Δ𝑝 = uncertainty in momentum. 4. Schrödinger Equation (Time-Dependent): 𝑖ℏ∂𝜓/∂𝑡 = −(ℏ2/2𝑚)∂2𝜓∂𝑥2 +𝑉(𝑥)𝜓 𝜓 = wave function, ℏ = reduced Planck’s constant, 𝑉(𝑥) = potential energy, 𝑚 = mass of the particle. •Applications of Quantum Physics: Quantum Computing: Uses the principles of superposition and entanglement to process information in ways that classical computers cannot, potentially solving complex problems much faster. Lasers: Use the concept of quantized energy levels. Atoms in a laser get excited to higher energy levels and then release photons of light in a controlled manner when they return to lower energy levels. 37 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 38. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Quantum Physics Semiconductors: The behavior of electrons in materials like silicon is explained by quantum mechanics. This understanding is the basis for modern electronics, including computers and smartphones. Medical Imaging: Technologies like MRI (Magnetic Resonance Imaging) use quantum principles to create detailed images of the inside of the human body. Conclusion: Quantum physics introduces strange but fundamental ideas about how the universe works at the smallest scales. It explains phenomena that classical physics cannot, such as the behavior of electrons in atoms, the nature of light, and the functioning of modern technology like lasers and semiconductors. Understanding these principles opens up new ways to explore and utilize the fundamental building blocks of the universe. 38 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 39. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Electromagnetic Spectrum Electromagnetic Spectrum: The electromagnetic spectrum encompasses all forms of electromagnetic radiation, which differ in wavelength and frequency. This spectrum is crucial for understanding how energy travels through space and interacts with matter. The electromagnetic spectrum is typically divided into several regions: Regions of the Electromagnetic Spectrum: Radio Waves: Wavelength: >10−1 m Frequency: <3×109 Hz < 3 × 109 Hz Uses: Communication (radio, television), radar. Microwaves: Wavelength: 10−1 m10 −1 m to 10−3 m10 −3 m Frequency: 3×109 Hz3×10 9 Hz to 3×1012 Hz3×10 12 Hz Uses: Microwave ovens, satellite communication, radar. Infrared Radiation: Wavelength: 10−3 m10 −3 m to 7×10−7 m7×10 −7 m Frequency: 3 × 1012 Hz to 4.3 × 1014 Hz Uses: Thermal imaging, remote controls, night-vision technology. 39 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 40. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Electromagnetic Spectrum Visible Light: Wavelength: 7 × 10−7 m (red) to 4 × 10−7 m (violet) Frequency: 4.3 × 1014 Hz to 7.5 × 1014 Hz Uses: The range of light visible to the human eye; essential for vision. Ultraviolet Radiation: Wavelength: 4×10−7 m4×10 −7 m to 10−8 m10 −8 m Frequency: 7.5×1014 Hz7.5×10 14 Hz to 3×1016 Hz3×10 16 Hz Uses: Sterilization, detecting counterfeit money, tanning. X-rays: Wavelength: 10−8 m10 −8 m to 10−11 m10 −11 m Frequency: 3×1016 Hz3×10 16 Hz to 3×1019 Hz3×10 19 Hz Uses: Medical imaging, security scanning. Gamma Rays: Wavelength: <10−11 m<10 −11 m Frequency: >3×1019 Hz>3×10 19 Hz Uses: Cancer treatment, sterilizing medical equipment, nuclear reactions. Key Characteristics: Speed of Light: All electromagnetic waves travel at the speed of light in a vacuum, approximately 𝑐 = 3 × 108 m/s. 40 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 41. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Electromagnetic Spectrum Frequency and Wavelength Relationship: The frequency (𝑓) and wavelength (𝜆) of electromagnetic waves are inversely related: 𝑐 = 𝑓⋅𝜆 Energy: The energy of electromagnetic radiation is directly related to its frequency. Higher frequency (shorter wavelength) radiation has more energy, as described by Planck's equation: 𝐸 = ℎ𝑓 Where: 𝐸 = energy, ℎ = Planck’s constant (6.626 × 10−34 J⋅s), 𝑓 = frequency. Applications of the Electromagnetic Spectrum: Communication: Radio and microwaves are essential for transmitting data wirelessly. Medicine: X-rays are used for imaging, while gamma rays are used in cancer treatment. Astronomy: Different wavelengths provide unique information about celestial objects. Environmental Science: Infrared radiation is used in remote sensing to study Earth's surface. Understanding the electromagnetic spectrum is vital for fields ranging from telecommunications to healthcare, as it underlies much of modern technology and scientific research. 41 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 42. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Radiation Laws • Radiation Laws: Radiation laws describe the emission and behavior of electromagnetic radiation, particularly in relation to temperature and the characteristics of radiating bodies. Here are the key radiation laws along with their equations: 1. Planck’s Law: Planck’s Law describes the spectral radiance of electromagnetic radiation emitted by a blackbody in thermal equilibrium at a given temperature 𝑇. Equation: 𝐼(𝜆,𝑇) = (2𝜋ℎ𝑐2/𝜆5)⋅1/(𝑒ℎ𝑐/𝜆𝑘𝑇− 1) Where: 𝐼(𝜆,𝑇) = intensity of radiation at wavelength 𝜆 and temperature 𝑇. ℎ = Planck’s constant (6.626 × 10−34 J⋅s). 𝑐 = speed of light (3 × 108 m/s) 𝑘 = Boltzmann’s constant (1.38 × 10−23 J/K). 𝜆 = wavelength. 𝑇 = absolute temperature in Kelvin. 42 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 43. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Radiation Laws 2. Stefan-Boltzmann Law: The Stefan-Boltzmann Law states that the total energy radiated per unit surface area of a blackbody is proportional to the fourth power of its absolute temperature. Equation: 𝑗∗=𝜎𝑇4 Where: 𝑗∗ = total energy radiated per unit area. 𝜎 = Stefan-Boltzmann constant (5.67×10−8 W/m2⋅K4) 𝑇 = absolute temperature in Kelvin. 3. Wien's Displacement Law: Wien's Displacement Law relates the temperature of a blackbody to the wavelength at which its emission is maximized. It shows that as the temperature increases, the peak wavelength of emission decreases. Equation: 𝜆max = 𝑏𝑇 Where: 𝜆max = wavelength of maximum emission. 𝑏 = Wien's displacement constant (2.898 × 10−3 m⋅K). 𝑇 = absolute temperature in Kelvin. 43 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 44. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Radiation Laws • Applications of Radiation Laws: Astrophysics: Understanding the temperature and composition of stars based on their radiation. Climate Science: Modeling Earth's radiation balance and energy transfer. Engineering: Designing thermal insulation and heat exchangers. Medical Imaging: Using principles of radiation for X-ray and MRI technologies. These laws provide a fundamental understanding of how objects emit radiation and are critical in various scientific and engineering fields. 44 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 45. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Blackbody Radiation • Blackbody Radiation: Blackbody radiation refers to the electromagnetic radiation emitted by an idealized perfect blackbody, which absorbs all incoming radiation and emits energy with a characteristic spectrum determined solely by its temperature. The study of blackbody radiation is foundational in understanding thermal radiation and quantum mechanics. Key Concepts: Perfect Absorber and Emitter: A blackbody does not reflect or transmit any radiation. It absorbs all wavelengths and re-emits energy based on its temperature. Spectrum: The radiation emitted by a blackbody is continuous and varies with temperature. As the temperature increases, the intensity of radiation increases, and the peak wavelength shifts to shorter wavelengths. Key Equations: Planck’s Law: 𝐼(𝜆,𝑇) = (2𝜋ℎ𝑐2/𝜆5)⋅1/(𝑒ℎ𝑐/𝜆𝑘𝑇− 1) Stefan-Boltzmann Law: 𝑗∗ = 𝜎𝑇4 Wien's Displacement Law: 𝜆max = 𝑏𝑇 45 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 46. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Blackbody Radiation Graph of Blackbody Radiation: The graph of spectral radiance versus wavelength for a blackbody at different temperatures shows: At lower temperatures, the peak of the curve is at longer wavelengths (infrared). As the temperature increases, the peak shifts to shorter wavelengths (visible light and beyond). Applications of Blackbody Radiation: Astrophysics: Helps determine the temperature and properties of stars based on their emitted radiation. Climate Science: Important in understanding Earth's energy balance and greenhouse effect. Thermal Imaging: Used in thermal cameras to detect emitted infrared radiation. Understanding blackbody radiation is crucial for various fields in science and engineering, forming the basis for modern theories of quantum mechanics and thermodynamics. 46 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 47. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Thermodynamics Thermodynamics: Thermodynamics is the study of energy, heat, and work and how they interact in physical systems. It provides fundamental principles that govern the behavior of matter and energy in various processes. Key Concepts: 1. System and Surroundings: System: The part of the universe being studied (e.g., a gas in a cylinder). Surroundings: Everything outside the system that can interact with it. 2. Types of Systems: Open System: Can exchange both energy and matter with its surroundings (e.g., a boiling pot). Closed System: Can exchange energy but not matter (e.g., a sealed gas container). Isolated System: Cannot exchange energy or matter with its surroundings (e.g., a thermos). 3. State Functions: Properties that depend only on the current state of the system, not on how it got there (e.g., temperature, pressure, volume). 47 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 48. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Thermodynamics Laws of Thermodynamics: Zeroth Law: Establishes the concept of temperature: If two systems are each in thermal equilibrium with a third system, they are in thermal equilibrium with each other. First Law (Law of Energy Conservation): Energy cannot be created or destroyed, only transformed. Δ𝑈 = 𝑄 − 𝑊 Where: Δ𝑈 = change in internal energy. 𝑄 = heat added to the system. 𝑊 = work done by the system. 48 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 49. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Thermodynamics Second Law: The total entropy of an isolated system can never decrease; it either remains constant or increases. This law implies that processes occur in the direction that increases the total entropy of the universe. For reversible processes: Δ𝑆 = 𝑄rev/𝑇 Where: Δ𝑆 = change in entropy. 𝑄rev = heat transfer in a reversible process. 𝑇 = absolute temperature. Third Law: As the temperature approaches absolute zero, the entropy of a perfect crystal approaches zero, providing a reference point for the determination of entropy. 49 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 50. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Thermodynamics Thermodynamic Processes: Isothermal Process: Occurs at constant temperature. Heat added equals work done: 𝑄 = 𝑊. Adiabatic Process: No heat exchange occurs (𝑄 =0). Change in internal energy equals work done: Δ𝑈 = −𝑊. Isobaric Process: Occurs at constant pressure. Work done is given by: 𝑊 = 𝑃Δ𝑉. Isochoric Process: Occurs at constant volume. No work is done (𝑊=0), and all heat added changes internal energy: Δ𝑈=𝑄. 50 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 51. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Thermodynamics Applications of Thermodynamics: Heat Engines: Analyze how engines convert heat into work, determining efficiency. Refrigeration: Study how refrigerators and heat pumps operate by moving heat from cold to hot areas. Chemical Reactions: Assess changes in enthalpy and entropy during reactions, guiding reactions' feasibility. Phase Changes: Examine energy changes involved in transitions between solid, liquid, and gas phases. Thermodynamics is foundational in physics, chemistry, and engineering, influencing various applications in daily life and technology. If you have specific topics within thermodynamics you'd like to explore further, feel free to ask! 51 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 52. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Thermodynamic Equilibrium Thermodynamic Equilibrium: Thermodynamic equilibrium refers to a state in which all macroscopic properties of a system are uniform and constant over time. In this state, there are no net flows of matter or energy within the system or between the system and its surroundings. Thermodynamic equilibrium can be divided into several types: Types of Equilibrium: Thermal Equilibrium: Occurs when two systems in thermal contact do not exchange heat, meaning they are at the same temperature. According to the Zeroth Law of Thermodynamics, if system A is in thermal equilibrium with system B, and system B is in thermal equilibrium with system C, then systems A and C are also in thermal equilibrium. Mechanical Equilibrium: Exists when there are no net forces acting within a system, meaning the pressure is uniform and there are no changes in volume or shape. In a closed system, this implies that the pressure is constant throughout the system. Chemical Equilibrium: Achieved in a chemical reaction when the rate of the forward reaction equals the rate of the reverse reaction. This results in constant concentrations of reactants and products over time. 52 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 53. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Thermodynamic Equilibrium Conditions for Thermodynamic Equilibrium: For a system to be in thermodynamic equilibrium, it must satisfy the following conditions: Uniform Temperature: The temperature must be the same throughout the system. Uniform Pressure: The pressure must be consistent across the entire system. Uniform Composition: The chemical potential and concentration of species must be constant throughout the system. Importance of Thermodynamic Equilibrium: Predictability: Systems in equilibrium can be analyzed and modeled with predictable outcomes. This predictability is essential in designing thermodynamic processes, such as engines and refrigeration cycles. Reference States: Equilibrium states serve as reference points for measuring changes in thermodynamic properties. Stability: Systems tend to move towards equilibrium, making this state a point of stability in physical processes. 53 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 54. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Thermodynamic Equilibrium Applications of Thermodynamic Equilibrium: Heat Engines: In the analysis of heat engines, understanding equilibrium helps determine the efficiency and performance of cycles like the Carnot cycle. Reactions in Chemistry: Equilibrium concepts are critical in chemical reactions, including the use of Le Chatelier's Principle to predict how changes in conditions will affect the position of equilibrium. Biological Processes: Many biological processes, such as enzyme reactions, depend on achieving equilibrium to function optimally. Equilibrium Constants in Chemistry: In chemical equilibrium, the ratio of concentrations of products to reactants is constant at a given temperature and is described by the equilibrium constant 𝐾: 𝐾 = [products]/[reactants] The specific form of the equation depends on the balanced chemical reaction. Understanding thermodynamic equilibrium is essential for analyzing and predicting the behavior of physical and chemical systems. If you have any specific aspects of thermodynamic equilibrium you'd like to explore further, let me know! 54 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 55. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Ideal Gas •Ideal Gas: An ideal gas is a theoretical gas composed of many randomly moving particles that interact only through elastic collisions and are assumed to obey a set of simplifying assumptions. Ideal gas behavior is described by the Ideal Gas Law, which relates pressure, volume, temperature, and the number of particles in the gas. Key Assumptions of the Ideal Gas Model: 1. Negligible Particle Volume: The individual gas molecules are considered to have negligible volume compared to the volume of the container. 2. No Intermolecular Forces: Gas particles do not exert attractive or repulsive forces on each other, meaning they only interact during elastic collisions. 3. Elastic Collisions: When gas particles collide with each other or the walls of the container, no kinetic energy is lost. 4.Continuous, Random Motion: Gas particles are constantly moving in random directions, with a distribution of speeds. 5. Obeys the Ideal Gas Law: The behavior of the gas follows the ideal gas law perfectly at all conditions. 55 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 56. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Ideal Gas The Ideal Gas Law: The Ideal Gas Law is an equation that relates the macroscopic properties of an ideal gas: pressure (𝑃), volume (𝑉), temperature (𝑇), and the number of moles (𝑛) of the gas. 𝑃𝑉 = 𝑛𝑅𝑇 Where: P: Pressure of the gas (in units like Pascals, atm, or torr). 𝑉: Volume of the gas (in liters or cubic meters). 𝑛: Number of moles of gas. 𝑅: Ideal gas constant. Its value depends on the units used: 𝑅 = 8.314 J/molcdotpK (when 𝑃 is in Pascals and 𝑉 is in cubic meters). 𝑅 = 0.0821 Lcdotpatm/molcdotpK (when 𝑃 is in atmospheres and 𝑉 is in liters). 𝑇: Temperature of the gas in Kelvin (K). Derived Equations from the Ideal Gas Law: Boyle’s Law (constant 𝑇 and 𝑛): 𝑃1𝑉1 = 𝑃2𝑉2 Pressure and volume are inversely proportional when temperature and the number of moles are constant. 56 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 57. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Ideal Gas Charles’s Law (constant 𝑃 and 𝑛): 𝑉1/𝑇1= 𝑉2/𝑇2 Volume is directly proportional to temperature when pressure and the number of moles are constant. Avogadro’s Law (constant 𝑇 and 𝑃): 𝑉1/𝑛1 = 𝑉2/𝑛2 Volume is directly proportional to the number of moles of gas at constant temperature and pressure . Gay-Lussac's Law (constant 𝑉 and 𝑛): 𝑃1/𝑇1=𝑃2/𝑇2 Pressure is directly proportional to temperature at constant volume. 57 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 58. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Ideal Gas Applications of the Ideal Gas Law: Determining Gas Properties: The Ideal Gas Law is often used to calculate one property (e.g., pressure, volume, or temperature) if the others are known. Kinetic Molecular Theory: The Ideal Gas Law is tied to the kinetic theory of gases, which describes gas particles' behavior on a microscopic level. Stoichiometry in Chemical Reactions: The Ideal Gas Law is useful in calculating the amounts of reactants or products in reactions involving gases. Gas Mixtures (Dalton’s Law): For a mixture of ideal gases, the total pressure is the sum of the partial pressures of the individual gases: 𝑃total = 𝑃1 + 𝑃2 + 𝑃3 + … Limitations of the Ideal Gas Model: High Pressure and Low Temperature: At high pressures or low temperatures, real gases deviate from ideal behavior because the assumptions of negligible volume and no intermolecular forces are no longer valid. Real Gases: For real gases, corrections to the ideal gas law are made using the Van der Waals equation, which accounts for the volume of particles and intermolecular forces. Understanding the ideal gas law and its applications is fundamental in many areas of chemistry and physics, particularly in understanding the behavior of gases in various environments. 58 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 59. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Energy Transfer Energy Transfer: Energy transfer refers to the movement of energy from one object or system to another, typically in the form of heat, work, or radiation. Energy cannot be created or destroyed (according to the First Law of Thermodynamics), so it is transferred between systems in different forms. Understanding how energy is transferred is essential in fields such as thermodynamics, physics, and engineering. Types of Energy Transfer: 1. Heat Transfer: Heat is the transfer of energy due to a temperature difference between two objects or systems. Heat can be transferred in three main ways: conduction, convection, and radiation. a. Conduction: The transfer of heat through direct contact between molecules. It occurs in solids, liquids, and gases, but it is most efficient in solids, especially metals. 𝑄/t = 𝑘𝐴Δ𝑇/d Where: 𝑄 = amount of heat transferred, 𝑘 = thermal conductivity of the material, 𝐴 = cross-sectional area. Δ𝑇 = temperature difference, 𝑑 = thickness of the material, and 𝑡 = time. 59 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 60. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Energy Transfer b. Convection: Heat transfer through the movement of fluids (liquids or gases). When a fluid is heated, it becomes less dense and rises, while cooler, denser fluid sinks, setting up a convection current. 𝑄/t = ℎ𝐴(𝑇surface − 𝑇fluid) Where: ℎ = convective heat transfer coefficient, 𝑇surface and 𝑇fluid = temperatures of the surface and the surrounding fluid. c. Radiation: The transfer of heat via electromagnetic waves, such as infrared radiation. Unlike conduction and convection, radiation can occur in a vacuum (e.g., the Sun heating the Earth). 𝑄/t = 𝜎𝜖𝐴𝑇4 Where: 𝜎 = Stefan-Boltzmann constant (5.67 × 10−8 W/m2⋅K4), 𝜖 = emissivity of the surface (ranges from 0 to 1), 𝐴 = surface area, 𝑇 = absolute temperature in Kelvin. 60 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 61. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Energy Transfer 2. Work: Work is the transfer of energy when a force is applied to an object causing displacement. In thermodynamics, work is often associated with gas expansion or compression. 𝑊 = 𝑃Δ𝑉 Where: 𝑊 = work done, 𝑃 = pressure, Δ𝑉 = change in volume. Mechanical Work: Energy transferred by a force acting over a distance. 𝑊 = 𝐹⋅𝑑 Where: 𝐹 = force, 𝑑 = displacement in the direction of the force. Electrical Work: Work is done when an electrical current flows through a circuit. 𝑊 = 𝑉𝐼𝑡 Where: 𝑉 = voltage, 𝐼 = current, 𝑡 = time. 61 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 62. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Energy Transfer Radiation: Energy transfer by electromagnetic waves, such as light, infrared, or ultraviolet radiation. Radiation is important in processes like solar heating and the emission of light from hot objects. Applications of Energy Transfer: Engines: In internal combustion engines, chemical energy from fuel is converted into thermal energy, which is then transformed into mechanical work. Refrigeration and Heat Pumps: Refrigerators and heat pumps transfer heat from a cooler area to a warmer area using mechanical work. Power Generation: Power plants transfer energy from burning fuel or nuclear reactions to steam, which is then converted into electrical energy through turbines. Heat Exchangers: Devices that transfer heat between two or more fluids without mixing them, commonly used in air conditioners, refrigerators, and car radiators. Summary: Energy transfer plays a crucial role in all physical and chemical processes. It is fundamental to understanding how systems evolve, how work is done, and how heat flows in various systems. Understanding energy transfer mechanisms is essential for applications in thermodynamics, engineering, and everyday technology. 62 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 63. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Spectroscopy and Atomic Physics Spectroscopy and Atomic Physics: Spectroscopy and atomic physics are closely intertwined, with spectroscopy serving as one of the primary methods to study the properties and behaviors of atoms and molecules. Spectroscopy provides crucial insights into atomic structures, energy levels, and the interactions between light and matter. Spectroscopy: The Study of Light and Matter Spectroscopy is the study of how light interacts with matter, specifically how atoms and molecules absorb, emit, or scatter electromagnetic radiation. It allows scientists to determine the energy levels of electrons in atoms and molecules, providing a detailed understanding of atomic and molecular structures. Types of Spectroscopy: 1. Absorption Spectroscopy: Atoms or molecules absorb specific wavelengths of light, which causes electrons to jump from lower energy levels to higher energy levels. This results in dark lines (absorption lines) in a continuous spectrum. 2. Emission Spectroscopy: When atoms or molecules return to a lower energy state, they emit light at specific wavelengths. This emitted light creates a series of bright lines (emission lines) against a dark background. 63 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 64. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Spectroscopy and Atomic Physics 3. Fluorescence and Phosphorescence: In fluorescence, atoms absorb light and then quickly re-emit it at longer wavelengths. Phosphorescence is similar, but the re-emission of light is delayed. 4. Raman Spectroscopy: Raman spectroscopy examines the inelastic scattering of light, which provides information about the vibrational and rotational energy levels of molecules. Atomic Physics: The Study of Atoms Atomic physics focuses on the structure of atoms, primarily the behavior of electrons in orbit around the nucleus. It also explores the interaction between atoms and electromagnetic radiation, which is the foundation of many spectroscopic techniques. Key Concepts in Atomic Physics: 1. Energy Levels: Electrons in atoms are confined to discrete energy levels. When an electron absorbs energy, it jumps to a higher energy level (excitation). When it returns to a lower level, it emits energy in the form of light (photon emission). 𝐸 = ℎ𝜈 E: Energy of the photon, ℎ: Planck's constant (6.626 × 10−34 Jcdotps) and 𝜈: Frequency of the radiation. 64 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 65. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Spectroscopy and Atomic Physics 2. Spectral Lines: Every element has a unique set of spectral lines, known as its atomic fingerprint. These lines arise from the transitions of electrons between energy levels within the atom. For example, hydrogen has well-known emission lines such as the Balmer series (in the visible range) and the Lyman series (in the ultraviolet range). 3. Quantum Transitions: Quantum mechanics governs the behavior of electrons in atoms, explaining why energy levels are quantized and how transitions between these levels produce distinct spectral lines. Spectral Series in Hydrogen The hydrogen atom provides a simple and well-studied system for understanding atomic spectra. Its electron transitions produce several series of spectral lines: Lyman Series: Ultraviolet emissions caused by electron transitions to the ground state (n = 1). 1/𝜆 = 𝑅𝐻(1 − 1/𝑛2), 𝑛 > 1 Balmer Series: Visible light emissions due to transitions to the second energy level (n = 2). 1/𝜆 = 𝑅𝐻(1/22 − 1/𝑛2), 𝑛 > 2 Where 𝑅𝐻 is the Rydberg constant (1.097 × 107 m−1)(1.097×10 7 m −1 ). 65 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 66. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Spectroscopy and Atomic Physics Paschen Series: Infrared emissions due to transitions to the third energy level (n = 3). Applications of Spectroscopy in Atomic Physics: 1. Elemental Analysis: Spectroscopy is used to identify elements in samples by comparing observed spectral lines to known atomic spectra. This method is used in astrophysics to determine the composition of stars and galaxies by analyzing the light they emit or absorb. 2. Determining Atomic Structure: Spectroscopy reveals the energy levels of electrons within an atom, providing insight into the atom's internal structure and the interactions of its electrons with external fields. 3. Studying Quantum Transitions: Atomic physics and spectroscopy are central to understanding quantum transitions, which are changes in an atom's energy state due to the absorption or emission of photons. This underpins technologies like lasers and atomic clocks. 4. Astronomical Spectroscopy: In astronomy, spectroscopy is vital for studying distant celestial objects. The Doppler shift of spectral lines is used to determine the movement of stars and galaxies, providing evidence for the expansion of the universe. 5. Medical Imaging: Techniques like MRI (Magnetic Resonance Imaging) rely on principles of atomic physics and spectroscopy to produce detailed images of the human body. 66 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 67. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Spectroscopy and Atomic Physics Quantum Mechanics and Spectroscopy In atomic physics, quantum mechanics explains why only certain wavelengths of light are absorbed or emitted by an atom. The Schrödinger equation provides the framework to calculate the allowed energy levels of electrons in atoms. Wave functions describe the probability of finding an electron in a particular location around the nucleus. The quantized energy levels and the transitions between them give rise to the atomic spectra observed in spectroscopy. Summary: Spectroscopy and atomic physics provide deep insights into the nature of atoms and their interactions with light. Through the study of spectral lines and atomic transitions, scientists can uncover information about the structure of atoms, their energy levels, and their behaviors in various environments. Spectroscopy remains one of the most powerful tools in both atomic physics and broader scientific fields like chemistry, astronomy, and materials science. 67 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 68. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Scattering in Physics Scattering in Physics: Scattering occurs when particles or waves (such as light, sound, or electromagnetic radiation) deviate from their original path due to interaction with other particles or structures. Types of Scattering: 1. Rayleigh Scattering: This is the scattering of light by particles much smaller than the wavelength of the light. It's responsible for the blue color of the sky. Shorter wavelengths (blue) are scattered more efficiently than longer wavelengths (red), making the sky appear blue. 𝐼 ∝ 1/𝜆4 Where: 𝐼 is Intensity of scattered light, 𝜆 is Wavelength of the light. 2. Mie Scattering: Scattering by particles that are comparable in size to the wavelength of light, like water droplets in clouds. It does not have a strong wavelength dependence, so it results in white light, explaining why clouds appear white. 3. Thomson Scattering: This is the elastic scattering of electromagnetic radiation by free electrons. It's a simpler case of scattering that assumes the electron is not bound to an atom. 68 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 69. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Scattering in Physics 4. Compton Scattering: In this form of scattering, high-energy photons (such as X-rays) collide with electrons, resulting in a decrease in energy (increase in wavelength) of the photons. The energy shift is given by: Δ𝜆 = (ℎ/𝑚𝑒𝑐)(1 − cos𝜃) h: Planck’s constant, 𝑚𝑒 : Electron mass, 𝑐: Speed of light and, 𝜃: Scattering angle. 5. Raman Scattering: Raman scattering occurs when light interacts with molecular vibrations or rotations, resulting in a change in the light's energy (or wavelength). This inelastic scattering leads to shifts in the frequency of scattered light, which provides insights into the vibrational modes of molecules. Applications of Scattering: 1. Atmospheric Physics: Rayleigh and Mie scattering explain many phenomena in the atmosphere, such as the color of the sky, sunsets, and the appearance of clouds. 69 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 70. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Scattering in Physics 2. Medical Imaging: Techniques like X-ray and CT scans rely on the principles of scattering to produce images of the body's interior. 3. Astronomy: Scattering plays a role in the analysis of light from stars and other celestial objects, giving clues about the composition of interstellar dust and gases. 4. Material Science: Scattering techniques (e.g., neutron scattering, X-ray diffraction) are widely used to study the structure of materials at the atomic or molecular level. 70 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 71. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Spectra of Celestial Objects • Spectra of Celestial Objects The spectrum of a celestial object is essentially a breakdown of the light emitted, absorbed, or reflected by the object. By studying the spectrum, scientists can gather important information about the physical properties of the object, such as its temperature, composition, motion, and more. Types of Spectra: There are three primary types of spectra that celestial objects can exhibit: 1.Continuous Spectrum: Produced by a hot, dense object such as a star or a solid body. A continuous spectrum shows all colors (wavelengths) without any interruptions. Example: The Sun emits a continuous spectrum due to its hot, dense core. 2. Emission Spectrum: Created when hot gas emits light at specific wavelengths. The spectrum shows bright emission lines at characteristic wavelengths, each corresponding to a different element. Example: Nebulae, composed of hot gases, often emit an emission spectrum revealing the elements like hydrogen and helium. 71 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 72. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Spectra of Celestial Objects 3. Absorption Spectrum: Produced when a cooler gas lies in front of a hotter source of continuous light. The gas absorbs specific wavelengths of light, leaving dark absorption lines in the spectrum. The Sun's spectrum is an absorption spectrum because cooler gas in the outer layers absorbs certain wavelengths from the inner hotter regions. How Spectroscopy Reveals Information about Celestial Objects 1.Chemical Composition: The absorption or emission lines in the spectrum of a celestial object correspond to specific elements or molecules. By comparing these lines to laboratory spectra, astronomers can determine which elements are present in stars, galaxies, and other objects. For example, the hydrogen Balmer series reveals the presence of hydrogen in many stars. 72 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 73. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Spectra of Celestial Objects 2. Temperature: The overall shape of the spectrum, particularly the peak wavelength, can indicate the temperature of the object. According to Wien’s Law: 𝜆max = 𝑏𝑇 Where 𝜆max is the wavelength at which the object emits the most light, 𝑏 is Wien’s constant (2.898×10−3 mcdotpK)(2.898×10 −3 mcdotpK), and 𝑇 is the temperature in Kelvin. 3. Velocity (Doppler Shift): By measuring the shift in the position of spectral lines, astronomers can determine whether an object is moving toward or away from us. This is known as the Doppler effect. Blueshift: If the lines are shifted toward shorter wavelengths, the object is moving toward us. Redshift: If the lines are shifted toward longer wavelengths, the object is moving away from us. 4. Mass and Gravity: The broadening of spectral lines can provide information about the mass or gravity of a celestial object. More massive stars or stars with higher gravity will show broader lines due to stronger gravitational effects on light. 73 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 74. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Spectra of Celestial Objects 5. Rotation: If an object is rotating, one side of the object will be moving toward us while the other side moves away. This causes a broadening or splitting of spectral lines due to the Doppler effect. Examples of Spectra in Celestial Objects: 1. Stars: Stars emit a continuous spectrum due to the dense, hot gases in their cores. Their outer layers produce absorption lines, which allow astronomers to determine the star’s composition, temperature, and movement. The OBAFGKM classification system for stars is based on their temperature, with O-type stars being the hottest (blue) and M-type stars the coolest (red). 2. Galaxies: Spectra of galaxies often show absorption lines from stars, but also emission lines from ionized gas in star-forming regions. The redshift of galaxy spectra provides evidence for the expanding universe and can be used to measure the distance to galaxies (Hubble’s Law). 3. Quasars: Quasars are distant, extremely bright objects powered by supermassive black holes. Their spectra show very strong emission lines, and their redshifts are used to determine their distance from Earth. 74 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 75. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Spectra of Celestial Objects 4. Planets: The spectra of planets and moons primarily reveal the composition of their atmospheres. For example, Earth’s atmosphere shows absorption bands of oxygen, water vapor, and carbon dioxide. Applications in Astronomy: Determining the Age of Stars: By studying the spectrum of a star cluster, astronomers can estimate the ages of the stars within it. Exoplanet Detection: The light from a star dims slightly as an exoplanet passes in front of it (transit method), and the planet's atmosphere can leave its spectral signature. Cosmology: The redshift of distant galaxies provides evidence for the expansion of the universe and supports the Big Bang theory. 75 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 76. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Doppler Effect • Doppler Effect: The Doppler Effect describes the change in frequency or wavelength of a wave due to the relative motion between the source of the wave and the observer. It is commonly observed with sound waves but also applies to electromagnetic waves, such as light. When dealing with very high speeds, especially near the speed of light, the relativistic Doppler Effect comes into play, which requires corrections based on Einstein’s theory of relativity. Classical Doppler Effect 1.For Sound Waves: The classical Doppler Effect formula (for sound waves in a stationary medium) depends on whether the observer and the source are moving toward or away from each other. General Formula: For an observer and a source both moving relative to the medium (e.g., air for sound waves): 𝑓′ = 𝑓((𝑣 + 𝑣𝑜)/(𝑣 − 𝑣𝑠)) Where: 𝑓′ = observed frequency, 𝑓 = emitted frequency (source), 𝑣 = speed of sound in the medium, 𝑣𝑜 = velocity of the observer relative to the medium (positive when moving toward the source), 𝑣𝑠 = velocity of the source relative to the medium (positive when moving toward the observer). When the observer moves toward the source, the frequency increases; when they move away, the frequency decreases. Likewise, the movement of the source affects the observed frequency similarly. 76 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 77. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Doppler Effect 2. For Electromagnetic Waves (Non-relativistic Approximation): For light and other electromagnetic waves at low speeds (much slower than the speed of light), the Doppler shift can be approximated by: 𝑓′ = 𝑓(1 + 𝑣𝑟/𝑐) Where: 𝑣𝑟 is the radial velocity (positive if moving toward the observer), 𝑐 is the speed of light. Relativistic Doppler Effect: When dealing with high velocities, especially velocities close to the speed of light, the relativistic Doppler Effect comes into play. This takes into account time dilation, as predicted by Einstein’s theory of relativity. 1.Relativistic Doppler Shift: For light waves or other electromagnetic waves, the relativistic Doppler Effect is given by: 𝑓′=𝑓[(1 + 𝑣/𝑐)/(1 − 𝑣/𝑐)] Where: 𝑓′ = observed frequency, 𝑓= emitted frequency (source), 𝑣 = relative velocity between the source and the observer (positive if moving toward the observer, negative if moving away), 𝑐 = speed of light. 2. Redshift and Blueshift: Blueshift occurs when the source is moving toward the observer, resulting in an increase in observed frequency. Redshift occurs when the source is moving away from the observer, causing a decrease in observed frequency. The relativistic equation also accounts for the fact that at high velocities, time dilation affects the rate at which waves are emitted and observed. 77 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 78. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Doppler Effect • Derivation (Relativistic Case): The relativistic Doppler shift formula arises from combining two key relativistic concepts: 1. Lorentz Transformation: The relationship between time intervals in different frames of reference moving relative to each other. Time Dilation: A moving clock ticks more slowly compared to a stationary observer. By considering the light emitted from the source in the frame of reference of both the observer and the source, we derive the relativistic Doppler shift. The result accounts for both the relative motion and the fact that time is dilated for the moving source. • Summary of Key Equations: Classical Doppler Effect for sound waves: 𝑓′ = 𝑓((𝑣 + 𝑣𝑜)/(𝑣 − 𝑣𝑠)) Relativistic Doppler Effect for electromagnetic waves: 𝑓′=𝑓[(1 + 𝑣/𝑐)/(1 − 𝑣/𝑐)] Both the classical and relativistic Doppler shifts are vital in many areas of physics, from understanding sound wave propagation to analyzing the movement of stars and galaxies through their light shifts. 78 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 79. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Nuclear Physics • Nuclear Physics: Nuclear Physics is a field focused on understanding the atomic nucleus, its interactions, structure, and behavior. To model and describe nuclear systems, nuclear physicists use several theories and equations that explain nuclear forces, energy, and decay processes. Here’s a detailed look at nuclear physics, including the models and mathematical formulations used to describe nuclear phenomena. 1. Models of the Nucleus: 1.1. Liquid Drop Model: The liquid drop model, introduced by George Gamow and later refined by Niels Bohr and others, treats the nucleus like a drop of incompressible fluid. This model explains nuclear binding energy and nuclear fission by assuming the nucleons behave similarly to molecules in a liquid drop. The forces acting between nucleons are analogous to surface tension and cohesion in a liquid. Binding Energy Formula (Semi-Empirical Mass Formula): The binding energy of a nucleus, which holds the protons and neutrons together, is approximated by the Bethe-Weizsäcker formula, also known as the semi- empirical mass formula (SEMF): 𝐵(𝑍,𝐴) = 𝑎𝑣𝐴 − 𝑎𝑠𝐴2/3 − 𝑎𝑐𝑍(𝑍 − 1)/𝐴1/3 − 𝑎𝑎(𝐴 − 2𝑍)2/𝐴 + 𝛿(𝐴,𝑍) Where: 𝐴 = mass number (total number of nucleons), 𝑍 = atomic number (number of protons), 𝑎𝑣 , 𝑎𝑠 , 𝑎𝑐 , and 𝑎𝑎 are constants that account for different nuclear effects: 79 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 80. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Nuclear Physics 𝑎𝑣 : Volume term (nucleon-nucleon attraction), 𝑎𝑠 : Surface term (surface nucleons have fewer neighbors, reducing binding), 𝑎𝑐 : Coulomb term (electrostatic repulsion between protons), 𝑎𝑎 : Asymmetry term (accounts for the energy cost of imbalance between protons and neutrons), 𝛿(𝐴,𝑍): Pairing term (a correction for nuclei with even numbers of protons and neutrons, making them more stable). 1.2. Shell Model: The shell model of the nucleus is analogous to the electron shell model in atomic physics. It explains the arrangement of protons and neutrons in discrete energy levels or "shells" within the nucleus. Each nucleon occupies a quantum state, and the energy levels are filled according to the Pauli Exclusion Principle (no two identical fermions can occupy the same quantum state). Key Concepts: Nucleons occupy discrete energy levels in potential wells. "Magic numbers" (2, 8, 20, 28, 50, 82, 126) correspond to fully filled shells, leading to particularly stable nuclei. 80 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 81. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Nuclear Physics Schrödinger Equation for Shell Model: The potential inside the nucleus is often modeled as a harmonic oscillator or a Woods-Saxon potential, but an exact equation for the energy levels is complex and relies on quantum mechanics. The Schrödinger equation in spherical coordinates for a nucleon moving in a potential 𝑉(𝑟)V(r) inside the nucleus is: (−ℏ2/2𝑚)∇2 + 𝑉(𝑟))𝜓(𝑟) = 𝐸𝜓(𝑟) Where: 𝜓(𝑟)) is the wave function of the nucleon, 𝐸 is the energy of the nucleon, 𝑉(𝑟) is the nuclear potential (often taken as a harmonic oscillator potential for simplification). 1.3. Collective Model: The collective model combines features of the liquid drop model and the shell model. It treats the nucleus as having both individual nucleon motion (like in the shell model) and collective behaviors (like vibrations and rotations, akin to the liquid drop model). Rotational States: For non-spherical nuclei, the energy of rotational states is quantized. The rotational energy levels for a nucleus can be described by: 𝐸 = (ℏ2/2𝐼).𝐽(𝐽 + 1) Where: 𝐼 is the moment of inertia of the nucleus, 𝐽 is the total angular momentum quantum number. 81 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 82. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Nuclear Physics Vibrational States: The nucleus can also undergo vibrations, particularly in quadrupole (elongated) modes. The energy for vibrational states is quantized in a manner similar to the harmonic oscillator: 𝐸𝑛 = ℏ𝜔(𝑛 + 1/2) 2. Nuclear Reactions and Decay: 2.1. Nuclear Reactions: Nuclear reactions involve changes to the nucleus when it interacts with another particle or nucleus. Two common types of nuclear reactions are fission and fusion. Fusion: The process where two light nuclei combine to form a heavier nucleus, releasing energy. The most important fusion reaction in stars is the fusion of hydrogen to form helium: 4(1,1)H → (4,2)He + 2𝑒+ + 2𝜈𝑒 + energy [ N.B: (A, Z)  (Atomic mass, Atomic Number) ] Fission: A heavy nucleus splits into two smaller nuclei, along with additional neutrons and energy. An example of fission in uranium-235 is: (235,92)U + 𝑛→ (141,56)Ba + (92,36)Kr + 3𝑛 + energy 82 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 83. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Nuclear Physics 2.2. Radioactive Decay: Alpha Decay: Emission of an alpha particle (two protons and two neutrons): (238,92) U → (234, 90) Th + (4,2)He Beta Decay: A neutron converts into a proton, and an electron (beta particle) and an antineutrino are emitted: 𝑛 → 𝑝 + 𝑒− + 𝜈ˉ𝑒 Gamma Decay: An excited nucleus releases energy in the form of gamma rays: (60,27)Co∗ → (60,27)Co + 𝛾 2.3. Decay Rates and Half-Life: The decay rate of a radioactive substance is characterized by its half-life (𝑡1/2), the time it takes for half of the radioactive nuclei to decay. The relationship between the number of undecayed nuclei 𝑁(𝑡) at time 𝑡 and the initial number 𝑁0 is given by: 𝑁(𝑡) = 𝑁0𝑒−𝜆𝑡 Where, 𝜆 is the decay constant, and 𝑡1/2 is related to 𝜆 by: 𝑡1/2 = ln(2)/𝜆 83 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 84. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Nuclear Physics 3. Equations in Nuclear Physics: 3.1. Mass-Energy Equivalence (Einstein’s Equation): One of the fundamental equations in nuclear physics is Einstein’s mass-energy equivalence: 𝐸 = 𝑚𝑐2 Where: 𝐸 is the energy, 𝑚 is the mass defect (difference between the mass of the nucleus and the sum of the masses of its constituent nucleons), 𝑐 is the speed of light. This equation explains how nuclear reactions release enormous amounts of energy due to the small mass differences involved. 3.2. Binding Energy per Nucleon: The binding energy per nucleon is a key indicator of the stability of a nucleus: 𝐵/𝐴 = 𝐸binding/𝐴 Where: 𝐵/𝐴 is the binding energy per nucleon, 𝐸binding is the total binding energy, 𝐴 is the mass number. • Conclusion: Nuclear physics involves complex interactions between the fundamental forces governing atomic nuclei. Through models like the liquid drop, shell, and collective models, as well as equations describing nuclear reactions and decay, we gain insights into how nuclei behave, decay, and produce energy. This understanding has led to critical applications such as nuclear energy, medical diagnostics, and even astrophysics. 84 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 85. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Atomic Physics Atomic Physics: Atomic Physics is the study of atoms, focusing on the behavior of electrons, the structure of the atom, and the interactions between atoms and electromagnetic radiation. The fundamental aspects of atomic physics involve the quantization of energy levels, electron transitions, and the emission or absorption of photons. Below is a detailed description of atomic physics with relevant equations and a figure that visually represents the atomic structure and behavior of electrons. Basic Concepts in Atomic Physics: 1.1. The Atom: An atom consists of a nucleus, which contains protons and neutrons, and electrons that move around the nucleus in quantized energy levels or shells. 1.2. Energy Levels of Electrons: Electrons in an atom occupy specific energy levels. When an electron transitions between energy levels, it either absorbs or emits a photon of energy corresponding to the difference between those levels. The Bohr Model for hydrogen gives a simple description of these energy levels. Energy of Electrons in the Bohr Model: 𝐸𝑛 = −13.6 eV/𝑛2. 85 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 86. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Atomic Physics Where: 𝐸𝑛 is the energy of an electron in the 𝑛-th energy level, 𝑛 is the principal quantum number (1, 2, 3, ...). 13.6 eV is the energy of the electron in the ground state of hydrogen. Radius of Electron Orbits: 𝑟𝑛 = 𝑛2⋅𝑟1 Where, 𝑟𝑛 is the radius of the electron orbit in the 𝑛-th level and 𝑟1 is the Bohr radius, approximately 0.529 × 10−10 meters. 2. Quantum Mechanics of the Atom: In atomic physics, the behavior of electrons is described by quantum mechanics, specifically the Schrödinger equation: 𝐻^𝜓 = 𝐸𝜓H^ Where: 𝐻^ is the Hamiltonian operator, which represents the total energy of the system (kinetic + potential energy), 𝜓 is the wave function of the electron, which gives the probability distribution of the electron's position, 𝐸 is the energy eigenvalue associated with the wave function. For the hydrogen atom, the potential energy of the electron is determined by the Coulomb force between the electron and the nucleus. The Schrödinger equation leads to the quantization of energy levels, which correspond to the orbits in the Bohr model. 86 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 87. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Atomic Physics Electron Transitions and Photons: When an electron moves from a higher energy level (𝑛2) to a lower energy level (𝑛1), a photon is emitted, and the energy of the photon is given by the difference in energy between the two levels: 𝐸photon = 𝐸𝑛2 − 𝐸𝑛1 The energy of the photon can also be related to its wavelength (𝜆) using the equation: 𝐸photon = ℎ𝑐/𝜆 Where: ℎ is Planck's constant (6.626 × 10−34 Js), 𝑐 is the speed of light (3.00 × 108 m/s), 𝜆 is the wavelength of the emitted or absorbed photon. 3. Atomic Spectra and the Rydberg Formula: The emission or absorption of photons by electrons transitioning between energy levels produces discrete spectral lines, which are characteristic of each element. The wavelength of these spectral lines is described by the Rydberg formula for hydrogen-like atoms: 1/𝜆 = 𝑅𝐻(1/𝑛1 2 − 1/𝑛1 2) Where: 𝜆 is the wavelength of the emitted/absorbed photon, 𝑅𝐻 is the Rydberg constant (1.097 × 107 m−1), 𝑛1 and 𝑛2 are the principal quantum numbers of the lower and higher energy levels, respectively. 87 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 88. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Atomic Physics 4. Atomic Orbitals and Quantum Numbers: In modern atomic theory, electrons are described by atomic orbitals, which are probability distributions that describe where an electron is likely to be found. The shape and orientation of these orbitals are described by quantum numbers: Principal Quantum Number (𝑛): Describes the size and energy of the orbital. Azimuthal Quantum Number (𝑙): Describes the shape of the orbital (s, p, d, f). Magnetic Quantum Number (𝑚𝑙): Describes the orientation of the orbital in space. Spin Quantum Number (𝑚𝑠): Describes the spin of the electron. 5. Diagram of Atomic Physics: It will be now generated a figure that visually represents the atom with energy levels, electron transitions, and the emission of photons, highlighting the concepts discussed above. The diagram above illustrates key atomic physics concepts, including the nucleus (protons and neutrons), electron energy levels, and electron transitions. Arrows show the movement of electrons between energy levels, accompanied by the emission or absorption of photons. The Bohr model is represented with circular orbits for quantized electron energy states. This visual complements the mathematical equations and principles of atomic physics discussed earlier. 88 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 89. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Sphere •Celestial sphere: 1.Introduction: The celestial sphere is a pivotal concept in astronomy that allows us to visualize and understand the positions and movements of celestial bodies. By imagining the sky as a vast, spherical surface surrounding the Earth, astronomers can simplify complex spatial relationships and make accurate predictions about celestial events. This document delves into the celestial sphere's definition, structure, equations, and applications, providing a comprehensive understanding of its importance in the field of astronomy. 2. Definition and Structure of the Celestial Sphere 2.1 What is the Celestial Sphere? The celestial sphere is an abstract model representing the universe surrounding Earth. It is an imaginary sphere with an infinitely large radius centered on the Earth. All celestial objects, such as stars, planets, and constellations, can be visualized as being projected onto this sphere. The celestial sphere provides a simplified framework for understanding the positions of celestial objects relative to an observer on Earth. 89 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 90. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Sphere 2.2 Key Components of the Celestial Sphere The celestial sphere is composed of various components that define its structure: Celestial Equator: The projection of Earth’s equator onto the celestial sphere. It divides the sphere into the northern and southern celestial hemispheres. Celestial Poles: The points where the Earth’s axis of rotation intersects the celestial sphere. The North Celestial Pole (NCP) is directly above the North Pole of the Earth, and the South Celestial Pole (SCP) is directly above the South Pole. Ecliptic Plane: The apparent path of the Sun across the celestial sphere throughout the year. The ecliptic plane is tilted at approximately 23.5° relative to the celestial equator due to the axial tilt of the Earth. Horizon: The boundary between the visible sky and the part of the celestial sphere that is obscured by the Earth. The observer’s local horizon is a circle that divides the celestial sphere into the visible celestial hemisphere and the hidden hemisphere. 2.2.1 Diagram of the Celestial Sphere The celestial sphere is a pivotal concept in astronomy that allows us to visualize and understand the positions and movements of celestial bodies. By imagining the sky as a vast, spherical surface surrounding the Earth, astronomers can simplify complex spatial relationships and make accurate predictions about celestial events. This document delves into the celestial sphere's definition, structure, equations, and applications, providing a comprehensive understanding of its importance in the field of astronomy. 90 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 91. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Sphere 2.3 Understanding the Celestial Sphere: The celestial sphere can be visualized as a dome over an observer's head. While the stars are fixed to the celestial sphere, they appear to move across the sky due to Earth's rotation and revolution around the Sun. The celestial sphere provides a framework for tracking these movements and understanding celestial phenomena. 2.3.1 The Rotation of the Celestial Sphere: The celestial sphere appears to rotate around the North and South Celestial Poles. This rotation is due to Earth's own rotation on its axis, which takes approximately 24 hours to complete. As a result, celestial objects appear to rise in the east, move across the sky, and set in the west. 2.3.2 The Motion of Celestial Objects: The motion of celestial objects can be described in terms of their position on the celestial sphere. Stars have fixed positions relative to one another, while planets, the Moon, and the Sun move against the backdrop of fixed stars. This movement is crucial for understanding celestial mechanics and predicting the positions of celestial objects. 91 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 92. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Sphere 3. Celestial Coordinates: Celestial coordinates are used to specify the positions of objects on the celestial sphere, similar to how latitude and longitude are used on Earth. The two primary systems of celestial coordinates are: 3.1 Equatorial Coordinate System: The equatorial coordinate system is the most commonly used system for locating objects in the sky. It consists of two main components: Right Ascension (RA): Equivalent to longitude, right ascension measures the angular distance of an object eastward along the celestial equator. It is measured in hours, minutes, and seconds. One hour of right ascension corresponds to 15° of angular distance. RA = ℎ/24 × 360∘ Where: ℎ is the hour angle in hours. Declination (Dec): Equivalent to latitude, declination measures the angular distance of an object north or south of the celestial equator. It is measured in degrees, with positive values indicating north and negative values indicating south. Dec = 𝜙 Where 𝜙 is the angle from the celestial equator. 92 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 93. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Sphere 3.2 Horizontal Coordinate System: The horizontal coordinate system is based on the observer's local horizon and includes two components: Altitude (Alt): The angle between the object and the observer’s horizon. Altitude is measured in degrees, with 0° at the horizon and 90° at the zenith (directly overhead). Azimuth (Az): The angle measured along the horizon, usually starting from true north and measured clockwise. It is also measured in degrees, ranging from 0° to 360°. 3.3 Converting Between Coordinate Systems: To locate celestial objects accurately, it is often necessary to convert between different coordinate systems. The transformation equations between the equatorial and horizontal coordinate systems are as follows: From Equatorial to Horizontal Coordinates Given the observer's latitude 𝜙ϕ and the right ascension 𝛼α and declination 𝛿δ of the object, the altitude ℎh and azimuth 𝐴A can be calculated using the following equations: ℎ = arcsin(sin(𝜙)sin(𝛿) + cos(𝜙)cos(𝛿)cos(𝛼)) 𝐴 = arctan(sin(𝛼)/(cos(𝛼)sin(𝜙) − tan(𝛿)cos(𝜙)) From Horizontal to Equatorial Coordinates To convert from horizontal to equatorial coordinates, the following equations can be used: 𝛿 = arcsin(sin(ℎ)sin(𝜙) + cos(ℎ)cos(𝜙)cos(𝐴)) 𝛼 = arctan(sin(𝐴)/(cos(𝐴)sin(𝜙) − tan(𝛿)cos(𝜙))) These transformations are crucial for astronomers and navigators to accurately locate celestial objects from different perspectives. 93 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 94. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Sphere 4. Spherical Trigonometry and the Celestial Sphere: Spherical trigonometry is the branch of mathematics that deals with the relationships between angles and distances on the surface of a sphere. It is particularly useful for calculating distances and angles on the celestial sphere. 4.1 Basic Spherical Triangle: A spherical triangle is formed by the arcs of great circles on the surface of a sphere. Each triangle has three sides and three angles, denoted as 𝑎 ,𝑏, 𝑐 for the sides and 𝐴, 𝐵, 𝐶 for the angles opposite those sides. In the context of the celestial sphere, these triangles can represent the angular separations between celestial objects. 4.1.1 Spherical Triangle Representation: The figure above illustrates a spherical triangle on the surface of a sphere, with vertices representing celestial objects and sides representing angular distances. 4.2 Law of Sines for Spherical Triangles: The law of sines for spherical triangles states: sin(𝑎)/sin(𝐴) = sin(𝑏)/sin(𝐵) = sin(𝑐)/sin(𝐶) Where: 𝑎,𝑏,𝑐, are the lengths of the sides of the triangle on the sphere. 𝐴,𝐵,𝐶 are the angles opposite to those sides. This law is essential for calculating the distances between celestial objects and their angles. For example, if an astronomer knows two sides of a spherical triangle formed by three stars, they can use the law of sines to find the third side or the angles. 94 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 95. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Sphere 4.3 Law of Cosines for Spherical Triangles: The law of cosines for spherical triangles can be expressed as: cos(𝑎) = cos(𝑏)cos(𝑐) + sin(𝑏)sin(𝑐)cos(𝐴) Where 𝐴 is the angle opposite side 𝑎. This law is useful for calculating unknown angles or sides in a spherical triangle, allowing astronomers to make precise measurements and predictions. 5. Applications of the Celestial Sphere: The celestial sphere model has numerous applications in astronomy and related fields. Some of the primary applications include: 5.1 Navigation: Navigators have historically relied on the celestial sphere for celestial navigation. By observing the positions of stars and other celestial objects, sailors can determine their latitude and longitude at sea. For example, by measuring the altitude of Polaris (the North Star), navigators can find their latitude in the Northern Hemisphere. 5.2 Astrophotography: Astrophotographers use the celestial sphere to plan their observations and capture images of celestial events. By understanding the positions of celestial objects, they can optimize their shooting angles and times to achieve the best results. 95 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 96. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Sphere 5.3 Star Mapping and Cataloging: Astronomers use the celestial sphere to create star maps and catalogs of celestial objects. These maps provide valuable information about the positions, brightness, and distances of stars, aiding in research and exploration. Various star catalogs, such as the Hipparcos catalog, utilize the celestial sphere framework to provide detailed information about thousands of stars. 5.4 Understanding Celestial Mechanics: The celestial sphere model is crucial for understanding celestial mechanics and the motions of planets, stars, and other celestial objects. It provides a framework for modeling the orbits of celestial bodies and predicting their positions in the sky. For instance, Kepler's laws of planetary motion can be applied to the celestial sphere to understand the orbits of planets around the Sun. 5.5 Astronomy Education: The celestial sphere is also an important educational tool in astronomy. It helps students and enthusiasts visualize the relationships between celestial objects, their movements, and the geometry of the sky. Many planetarium software programs use the celestial sphere model to simulate the night sky and provide interactive learning experiences. 96 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 97. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Sphere 6. Additional Considerations: 6.1 Precession of the Equinoxes: One important factor affecting the celestial sphere is the precession of the equinoxes. This phenomenon refers to the gradual shift of the celestial poles and the equinoxes due to gravitational interactions with the Moon and the Sun. The precession causes the coordinates of celestial objects to change over long periods, affecting their positions in the sky. 6.1.1 Causes of Precession: The precession of the equinoxes is caused by the gravitational pull of the Sun and the Moon on Earth's equatorial bulge. This pull creates a torque that causes the Earth's axis to wobble slowly over time. The precession cycle takes approximately 26,000 years to complete, leading to a gradual shift in the positions of celestial objects. 6.2 Nutation: Nutation is another small oscillation in the orientation of the Earth’s axis that affects the celestial sphere. It occurs due to gravitational interactions with the Moon and causes periodic changes in the positions of celestial objects. The nutation cycle has a period of about 18.6 years and results in small variations in the coordinates of celestial objects. 97 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 98. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Celestial Sphere 6.3 Aberration of Starlight: The motion of Earth around the Sun causes a phenomenon known as the aberration of starlight, which results in a slight apparent shift in the positions of stars. This effect must be considered when calculating celestial coordinates. The angle of aberration is given by: 𝜃 = arctan(𝑣/𝑐) Where: 𝑣 is the velocity of the Earth in its orbit around the Sun. 𝑐 is the speed of light. The aberration causes stars to appear slightly shifted from their true positions, which must be accounted for in precise astronomical observations. 7. Conclusion: The celestial sphere is a vital concept in astronomy that simplifies the understanding of the positions and motions of celestial objects. By providing a framework for celestial coordinates, spherical trigonometry, and various applications, the celestial sphere serves as an essential tool for astronomers, navigators, and enthusiasts alike. Understanding its structure and the equations that govern it is crucial for accurately observing and interpreting the wonders of the night sky. Through the study of the celestial sphere, we gain insights into the mechanics of the universe, enhancing our knowledge of celestial phenomena and the intricate relationships that govern the cosmos. 98 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 99. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Concept of time The concept of time: The concept of time in astronomy is a profound and multifaceted subject that stretches from ancient observations of celestial bodies to modern theories involving relativity and the very origin of the universe. Time serves as the backbone for understanding the cosmos, from the motion of planets and stars to the evolution of galaxies over billions of years. Key Aspects of Time in Astronomy: 1. Astronomical Timekeeping and Measurement 2. Time Dilation in Relativity 3. Cosmic Time and the Evolution of the Universe 4. Astronomical Time Scales 5. The Future and Fate of Time in Cosmology Let’s delve into each aspect in detail:. 99 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 100. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Concept of time 1.Astronomical Timekeeping and Measurement: 1.1 Solar Time: In early astronomy, time was primarily measured by the apparent movement of the Sun across the sky. The day was divided into periods based on the Sun's position, leading to the concept of solar time. A solar day is the interval from one noon to the next, with noon defined as the time when the Sun is at its highest point in the sky. However, the length of a solar day varies slightly throughout the year due to Earth’s elliptical orbit and axial tilt. To account for these irregularities, mean solar time is used, which averages the length of the solar day over the entire year. 1.2 Sidereal Time: Sidereal time is based on the Earth’s rotation relative to distant stars rather than the Sun. A sidereal day is about 4 minutes shorter than a solar day because the Earth must rotate slightly more than one full revolution to bring the Sun back to the same position in the sky. This time system is crucial for astronomers when tracking stars and deep-space objects, as the same star will rise at the same sidereal time each night. 1.3 UTC and Julian Date: Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is the modern standard for civil timekeeping. UTC is adjusted for irregularities in the Earth’s rotation by introducing leap seconds. Astronomers often use the Julian Date (JD) system, a continuous count of days starting from January 1, 4713 BCE. This system allows for precise time tracking without the complexities of calendar systems. 1.4 Ephemeris Time: Ephemeris Time (ET) was a time standard used from 1952 to 1976, derived from the motion of celestial bodies. It was replaced by Terrestrial Time (TT) but is still of historical significance. It was developed to provide a uniform measure of time for astronomical purposes that is unaffected by irregularities in Earth’s rotation. 100 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 101. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Concept of time 2. Time Dilation in Relativity: In the early 20th century, Einstein’s theory of special relativity revolutionized the concept of time. One of its key insights is that time is not absolute; it can vary depending on an observer’s velocity or the strength of gravitational fields. 2.1 Time Dilation in Special Relativity: When an object moves close to the speed of light, time for that object slows down relative to an observer at rest. This phenomenon is called time dilation. The equation for time dilation is: Δ𝑡′= Δ𝑡(1 − 𝑣2/𝑐2) Where: Δ𝑡′ is the time experienced by the moving observer, Δ𝑡 is the time experienced by a stationary observer, 𝑣 is the velocity of the moving observer, and 𝑐 is the speed of light. This has profound implications for space travel and understanding objects moving at relativistic speeds, such as jets of matter expelled from quasars or near-black-hole phenomena. 101 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 102. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Concept of time 2.2 Gravitational Time Dilation: General relativity expands on this by showing that time is also affected by gravity. Near massive objects like stars or black holes, the curvature of spacetime causes time to slow down for objects in strong gravitational fields relative to distant observers.The equation for gravitational time dilation is: Δ𝑡′ = Δ𝑡(1 − 2𝐺𝑀/𝑟𝑐2) Where: 𝐺 is the gravitational constant, 𝑀 is the mass of the object, 𝑟 is the distance from the object’s center, 𝑐 is the speed of light. In regions close to the event horizon of a black hole, time dilation becomes extreme, causing time to essentially stand still from the perspective of an outside observer. 3. Cosmic Time and the Evolution of the Universe: 3.1 Age of the Universe: The cosmic time scale begins with the Big Bang, the moment when the universe began expanding from an extremely hot, dense state. According to current cosmological models, the universe is approximately 13.8 billion years old. The cosmic timeline encompasses several important stages: Recombination: Around 380,000 years after the Big Bang, atoms formed, and the universe became transparent to light, resulting in the cosmic microwave background (CMB) radiation that we observe today. Stellar Formation: The first stars and galaxies began to form a few hundred million years after the Big Bang.Galactic Evolution: Over billions of years, galaxies coalesced, evolved, and interacted. 102 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 103. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Concept of time 3.2 Hubble’s Law and Time: The Hubble constant (H₀) is a measure of the rate at which the universe is expanding. It is central to understanding the relationship between time and the large-scale structure of the universe. The age of the universe can be estimated from Hubble’s Law: 𝑡 = 1/𝐻0 Where: 𝐻0 is the Hubble constant, expressed in km/s/Mpc. This gives a rough estimate of the age of the universe by assuming constant expansion, although cosmologists now know that expansion is accelerating due to dark energy. 4. Astronomical Time Scales: Astronomy deals with a vast range of time scales, from the milliseconds of pulsar rotations to the billions of years of galactic evolution. 4.1 Stellar Evolution: Stars evolve over billions of years, following predictable paths: Low-mass stars like our Sun spend billions of years fusing hydrogen into helium in their cores. Massive stars live shorter lives (millions of years) before exploding as supernovae. The lifetime of a star can be roughly estimated based on its mass using the formula: 𝑡life ∝ 1/𝑀3 Where 𝑡lifet life​ is the star’s lifetime, and 𝑀M is its mass relative to the Sun. 103 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 104. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Concept of time 4.2 Pulsar Timekeeping: Pulsars, highly magnetized, rotating neutron stars, emit beams of radiation that sweep past Earth at incredibly regular intervals. The rotation periods of some pulsars are measured with an accuracy rivaling atomic clocks. The study of pulsars has applications in probing extreme physics, testing general relativity, and measuring time with incredible precision. 4.3 Orbital Mechanics: Planetary motion provides a natural clock. For instance, the orbital period of Earth around the Sun defines the year, while the Moon’s orbit around Earth defines the month. Astronomers apply Kepler’s laws of planetary motion to calculate orbital periods and predict future positions of celestial bodies. 5. The Future and Fate of Time in Cosmology: 5.1 The Arrow of Time: In thermodynamics, time is said to have an arrow because entropy (disorder) always increases over time, giving a directionality to time. In the universe, this principle is linked to the expansion of the universe. The arrow of time is consistent with the progression from the highly ordered state of the early universe to the more disordered state of the present and future universe. 104 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 105. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Concept of time 5.2 The Fate of the Universe: Cosmologists consider several possible fates for the universe, each of which has implications for the concept of time: Continued Expansion: The universe continues expanding forever, leading to a cold, dark, and empty universe (the "Big Freeze"). Big Crunch: If dark energy reverses its influence, the universe could eventually collapse back into a hot, dense state, effectively rewinding time. Big Rip: In some models, dark energy accelerates the expansion so much that eventually, even atoms and subatomic particles are torn apart. In these scenarios, time as we know it would cease to exist as the universe either cools to near absolute zero or compresses into an incredibly dense point. • Conclusion: Time is a fundamental concept in astronomy, from the simple observation of the Sun’s movement across the sky to the complex relativistic effects near black holes. Time governs the life cycles of stars, the orbits of planets, and the evolution of the universe itself. Through the lens of both classical mechanics and modern cosmology, time allows us to place the universe in a structured framework, giving us the tools to predict celestial events and understand our place in the cosmos. 105 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 106. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Equation of Time • Equation of Time: To explain the Equation of Time (EoT) along with a figure, let’s break it down with both equations and a clear description of the graph that typically accompanies this concept. Equation of Time Overview: The Equation of Time (EoT) is the difference between solar time (time measured using the Sun's position, e.g., on a sundial) and mean solar time (the time kept by clocks). The discrepancy arises due to two primary factors: Earth’s elliptical orbit around the Sun, which causes its orbital speed to vary (faster at perihelion and slower at aphelion). Earth’s axial tilt (obliquity), which affects the Sun’s apparent motion in the sky throughout the year. The Equation of Time is expressed mathematically as the sum of two components: One related to orbital eccentricity (Earth's elliptical orbit). One related to axial tilt (Earth's obliquity). 106 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 107. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Equation of Time Equation of Time Formula: The general form of the equation is: E(t) = E1(t) + E2(t) 1. Orbital Eccentricity Component (E1(t)) This component accounts for the variation in the Earth’s speed along its elliptical orbit. The time correction due to orbital eccentricity is approximately: E1(t )= 2esin(M) Where: e is the orbital eccentricity of Earth’s orbit (around 0.0167), M is the mean anomaly, which is the angle the Earth would have traveled if its orbit were circular. 2. Axial Tilt Component (E2(t)E_2(t)E2​(t)) This component reflects the effect of the Earth’s axial tilt, which alters the Sun’s apparent motion in the sky. The time correction due to axial tilt (obliquity) is approximately: E2(t) = tan(ϵ/2)sin(2L) Where: ϵ is the obliquity (axial tilt of the Earth, about 23.44°), L is the mean longitude of the Sun. 107 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 108. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Equation of Time Total Equation of Time: The total Equation of Time is the combination of both corrections: E(t) = 2esin(M) + tan(ϵ/2)sin(2L) The result of this equation gives the difference (in minutes) between apparent solar time and mean solar time on any given day. Visual Representation: The Analemma A commonly used figure to visualize the Equation of Time is the Analemma, a figure- eight-shaped diagram showing the Sun’s position in the sky at the same clock time over the course of a year. Description of the Figure: X-Axis: Represents the difference between solar time and mean solar time (i.e., the Equation of Time). Positive values: Solar time is ahead of clock time. Negative values: Solar time is behind clock time. Y-Axis: Represents the declination of the Sun, which is its angular position north or south of the celestial equator. The figure-eight shape occurs because of the combined effects of axial tilt and orbital eccentricity. At different points on the figure: Maximum positive deviation occurs around early November (the Sun is ahead of mean time). Maximum negative deviation occurs around mid-February (the Sun is behind mean time). 108 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 109. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Equation of Time Drawing the Analemma The upper loop of the figure-eight corresponds to the Sun's position during summer in the northern hemisphere. The lower loop corresponds to the Sun's position during winter. The horizontal displacement from the center of the figure shows the time difference due to the Equation of Time, reaching maxima and minima in early November and mid-February. • Summary The Equation of Time results from the combined effects of Earth's elliptical orbit and axial tilt. Its value varies throughout the year, reaching a maximum of about +16 minutes and a minimum of -16 minutes. The Analemma provides a visual way to represent both the Equation of Time and the Sun's declination. 109 The equation of time: above the axis a sundial will appear fast relative to a clock showing local mean time, and below the axis a sundial will appear slow Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 110. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System • The Solar System: Introduction: The Solar System, a complex and dynamic environment, consists of the Sun, planets, moons, asteroids, comets, and various other celestial bodies. Understanding its formation and construction offers insights into the processes that shaped not only our cosmic neighborhood but also the broader universe. This account covers the structure of the Solar System, the theories of its formation, and the evolutionary processes that led to its current configuration. 1. Structure of the Solar System: The Solar System can be divided into several key components: 1.1 The Sun: The Sun is a G-type main-sequence star (G dwarf) at the center of the Solar System, accounting for about 99.86% of its total mass. It is primarily composed of hydrogen (approximately 74%) and helium (about 24%), with trace amounts of heavier elements. Structure of the Sun: Core: The innermost region where nuclear fusion occurs, converting hydrogen into helium and producing energy. Radiative Zone: Surrounding the core, energy produced in the core moves outward through radiation. Convective Zone: In this outer layer, energy is transported by convection currents. Photosphere: The visible surface of the Sun, from which light is emitted. Chromosphere and Corona: The outer layers of the Sun’s atmosphere, visible during solar eclipses. 110 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 111. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System 1.2 The Planets The Solar System consists of eight recognized planets, categorized into terrestrial (rocky) planets and gas giants. Terrestrial Planets: Mercury: Distance from the Sun: ~57.9 million km Diameter: 4,880 km Moons: 0 Key Features: Closest planet to the Sun; extreme temperature fluctuations; heavily cratered surface. Venus: Distance from the Sun: ~108.2 million km Diameter: 12,104 km Moons: 0 Key Features: Similar in size to Earth; thick, toxic atmosphere; surface temperatures can reach up to 465°C. Earth: Distance from the Sun: ~149.6 million km Diameter: 12,742 km Moons: 1 (the Moon) Key Features: The only known planet to support life; has liquid water and a diverse climate. Mars: Distance from the Sun: ~227.9 million km Diameter: 6,779 km Moons: 2 (Phobos and Deimos) Key Features: Known as the Red Planet; has the largest volcano and canyon in the Solar System. 111 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 112. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System Gas Giants: Jupiter: Distance from the Sun: ~778.5 million km Diameter: 139,820 km Moons: 79 (including Ganymede, the largest moon) Key Features: The largest planet; features a Great Red Spot, a massive storm; primarily composed of hydrogen and helium. Saturn: Distance from the Sun: ~1.4 billion km Diameter: 116,460 km Moons: 83 (including Titan, larger than Mercury) Key Features: Renowned for its prominent ring system; gas giant made mostly of hydrogen and helium. Uranus: Distance from the Sun: ~2.9 billion km Diameter: 50,724 km Moons: 27 (including Titania and Oberon) Key Features: An ice giant with a unique tilted rotation axis; has a faint ring system. Neptune: Distance from the Sun: ~4.5 billion km Diameter: 49,244 km Moons: 14 (including Triton) Key Features: Farthest planet from the Sun; known for strong winds and a deep blue color due to methane in its atmosphere. 112 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 113. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System 1.3 Dwarf Planets: Dwarf planets are celestial bodies that orbit the Sun but do not clear their orbits. Some notable dwarf planets include: Pluto: Once considered the ninth planet, now classified as a dwarf planet with five known moons, the largest being Charon. Eris: Located in the scattered disc, it’s one of the most massive known dwarf planets. Haumea and Makemake: Other recognized dwarf planets in the Kuiper Belt. 1.4 Moons: Many planets have natural satellites, or moons. For example: Earth: The Moon. Mars: Phobos and Deimos. Jupiter and Saturn: Host a multitude of moons, some of which are larger than the planets themselves. 1.5 Asteroids and Comets Asteroids: Primarily found in the asteroid belt between Mars and Jupiter, these rocky bodies are remnants from the early Solar System. Comets: Composed of ice and dust, comets have distinctive tails that develop when they approach the Sun. Famous examples include Halley's Comet. 113 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 114. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System 1.6 Kuiper Belt and Oort Cloud Kuiper Belt: A region beyond Neptune filled with icy bodies and dwarf planets, believed to be the source of many short-period comets. Oort Cloud: A hypothetical cloud of icy bodies surrounding the Solar System, thought to be the source of long-period comets. 2. Formation of the Solar System The formation of the Solar System is a complex process that occurred over billions of years and can be broken down into several key stages: 2.1 The Pre-Solar Nebula The Solar System originated from a giant molecular cloud, or solar nebula, composed of gas and dust. This nebula may have been influenced by shock waves from nearby supernovae, causing it to collapse under its own gravity. 2.2 Formation of the Protosun As the nebula collapsed, it began to rotate and flatten into a disk. Most of the material accumulated at the center, forming the protosun. Heating and Nuclear Fusion: As the protosun's core temperature increased, nuclear fusion eventually ignited, converting hydrogen into helium and producing energy. This process marked the birth of the Sun. 114 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 115. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System 2.3 Accretion of Planetesimals: In the cooler regions of the rotating disk, small dust and ice particles began to stick together through electrostatic forces, forming planetesimals—small bodies ranging from a few meters to several kilometers in size. Collisions and Growth: These planetesimals collided and merged, gradually forming larger bodies called protoplanets. This process, known as accretion, led to the growth of the first planets. 2.4 Formation of Protoplanets: As protoplanets grew, their internal heat increased due to radioactive decay and the energy from collisions. Differentiation: The heat caused the interiors of these bodies to melt, allowing heavier materials to sink to the center and lighter materials to rise, resulting in layered structures (core, mantle, crust). 2.5 Temperature Gradient and Planet Types The Solar System's temperature gradient played a crucial role in determining the types of planets that formed: Terrestrial Planets: Closer to the Sun, where temperatures were too high for volatile compounds to condense, rocky planets formed (Mercury, Venus, Earth, Mars). Gas Giants: In the cooler outer regions, gas and ice could condense, leading to the formation of gas giants (Jupiter and Saturn) and ice giants (Uranus and Neptune). 115 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 116. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System 2.6 Clearing the Orbital Zone: As planets formed and grew larger, their gravitational forces cleared the surrounding debris from their orbits. Planetary Migration: Some theories suggest that gas giants may have migrated inward and outward due to gravitational interactions, affecting the arrangement and formation of terrestrial planets. 2.7 Formation of Moons and Rings: Many moons likely formed from leftover debris or through the capture of passing objects. Ring Systems: Saturn’s rings are believed to have formed from material that was unable to coalesce into a moon due to tidal forces exerted by the planet. 2.8 Asteroids and Kuiper Belt Leftover planetesimals that did not coalesce into planets became asteroids, particularly in the asteroid belt. Kuiper Belt: Beyond Neptune, icy bodies formed the Kuiper Belt, a remnant of the early Solar System. 2.9 Formation of the Oort Cloud The Oort Cloud is a hypothetical spherical shell of icy bodies surrounding the Solar System, thought to be the source of long-period comets. Scattering: It is believed that interactions with gas giants caused many icy bodies to be scattered into this distant region. 116 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 117. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System 2.10 Timeline of Formation: Nebula Stage: Approximately 4.6 billion years ago. Sun Formation: Occurred within the first few million years. Planet Formation: Planets formed over the next several million years, with terrestrial planets forming before gas giants. Stabilization: The Solar System reached a stable configuration approximately 4 billion years ago. 3. Conclusion: The Solar System is a remarkable product of gravitational dynamics, thermodynamics, and cosmic events. Its formation involved the complex interplay of processes that began with a nebula and culminated in the diverse array of celestial bodies we observe today. From the Sun at its center to the distant reaches of the Kuiper Belt and Oort Cloud, each component of the Solar System tells a story of evolution and change. Understanding this intricate history not only helps us appreciate our own place in the cosmos but also informs our search for other planetary systems and the possibility of life beyond Earth. As research continues and technology advances, we will uncover more about the origins and mechanics of our Solar System, shedding light on the mysteries of the universe. 117 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 118. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System Sidereal Period: The sidereal period of a celestial body refers to the time it takes for the body to complete one full orbit around a central object (like the Sun) relative to the stars. For planets in our solar system, this is the time it takes them to return to the same position against the background of distant stars. •For Earth, the sidereal period is one year, or about 365.25 days. •For other planets, the sidereal period depends on their distance from the Sun (according to Kepler's Third Law). Synodic Period: The synodic period is the time between successive conjunctions or alignments of two celestial objects, typically observed from a third object (such as Earth). For planets, the synodic period is the time between two consecutive alignments with the Sun and Earth, which is typically longer than the sidereal period. For example: •For Mercury and Venus, which are closer to the Sun than Earth, their synodic period is the time between successive inferior conjunctions (when the planet passes between Earth and the Sun). •For Mars and the outer planets, the synodic period refers to the time between successive oppositions (when the planet is on the opposite side of Earth from the Sun). Example Equations: To calculate the synodic period 𝑆 of a planet relative to Earth: 1/𝑆 = ∣1/𝑃 − 1/𝐸∣ Where: 𝑆 is the synodic period.𝑃P is the planet's sidereal period. 𝐸 is Earth's sidereal period (which is 1 year). This relationship applies for both inner and outer planets, with different contexts for inferior and superior conjunctions/oppositions. 118 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 119. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System • Precession refers to the slow, conical motion of the rotation axis of a celestial body. For Earth, precession is caused by the gravitational forces of the Moon and the Sun acting on Earth's equatorial bulge, which makes the axis of Earth's rotation slowly trace out a cone. This motion results in a gradual shift of the positions of the celestial poles and the equinoxes over a period of about 26,000 years (the precession cycle). Precession also affects the orientation of the Earth relative to the background stars. • Example: The North Star will not always be Polaris, because of the Earth's precession. Thousands of years ago, the star Thuban was the pole star. • Nutation is a smaller oscillation superimposed on the precessional motion of a celestial body. For Earth, nutation results in a slight periodic "nodding" motion of the rotation axis. This is mainly caused by the gravitational influence of the Moon and Sun, but it also arises from the tilt of the Earth's axis relative to its orbital plane. Nutation causes the axis to oscillate around its precessional path in a small periodic cycle (typically about 18.6 years). • Example: Nutation causes variations in the Earth's orientation over shorter timescales compared to precession. • Libration refers to the apparent oscillating motion of the Moon as observed from Earth. It occurs due to variations in the Moon’s speed along its orbit and the tilt of its rotational axis. As a result, over time, we can observe slightly more than half (about 59%) of the Moon’s surface, even though the same face of the Moon is always turned towards Earth. • There are several types of libration: • Libration in longitude: Due to the elliptical shape of the Moon’s orbit, its speed varies, and we see a bit more of its eastern or western limb at different points in the orbit. • Libration in latitude: Caused by the tilt of the Moon’s axis relative to its orbit, allowing us to see slightly more of the Moon's north or south pole. • Diurnal libration: This is a small daily oscillation caused by the observer’s perspective from different points on Earth's surface due to its rotation. • Example: When the Moon librates, we can observe slightly more of its surface than would otherwise be possible. 119 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 120. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System Eclipses and transits are two fascinating celestial phenomena that have been studied by astronomers for centuries. They offer valuable insights into the workings of our solar system and beyond. An eclipse occurs when one celestial body blocks the light from another, casting a shadow on the third, while a transit happens when a smaller celestial body passes between a larger one and the observer without completely blocking it. These events are not just visually stunning but also scientifically significant, helping us understand the orbits of celestial objects, their sizes, distances, and even discover new planets. In this article, we will explore the causes, effects, equations, and calculations involved in eclipses and transits, complete with relevant figures for clarity. Causes of Eclipses: Eclipses are caused by the alignment of celestial bodies. They occur when one celestial body moves into the shadow of another. The most common eclipses are solar eclipses and lunar eclipses. 1. Solar Eclipse: A solar eclipse occurs when the Moon passes between the Earth and the Sun, casting its shadow on the Earth. This alignment temporarily blocks sunlight from reaching parts of the Earth. Solar eclipses can be classified into three types: Total Solar Eclipse: The Moon completely covers the Sun, and only the Sun’s corona (outer atmosphere) is visible. This can only happen if the Moon is close enough to Earth in its orbit to fully obscure the Sun. Partial Solar Eclipse: The Moon covers only part of the Sun. This occurs when the Sun, Moon, and Earth are not perfectly aligned. Annular Solar Eclipse: The Moon is too far from the Earth to completely cover the Sun. As a result, a ring of the Sun remains visible around the Moon, creating a "ring of fire." 120 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 121. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System 2. Lunar Eclipse: • A lunar eclipse occurs when the Earth passes between the Sun and the Moon, casting a shadow on the Moon. This causes the Moon to darken or even turn a reddish color due to the refraction of sunlight through the Earth's atmosphere. There are three types of lunar eclipses: • Total Lunar Eclipse: The Moon is completely immersed in Earth’s shadow (umbra), resulting in a “blood moon” effect where the Moon appears red. • Partial Lunar Eclipse: Only part of the Moon enters Earth’s umbra, leaving the rest in the penumbral shadow. • Penumbral Lunar Eclipse: The Moon passes through only the Earth’s penumbral shadow, causing a slight dimming of its brightness. 121 Figure 1: Diagram showing Total, Partial, and Annular Solar Eclipse Figure 2: Diagram showing Total, Partial, and Penumbral Lunar Eclipse Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 122. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System Causes of Transits: Transits occur when a smaller celestial body passes in front of a larger one, from the perspective of an observer. Transits within our solar system generally refer to the transits of Mercury and transits of Venus, where these planets pass between the Earth and the Sun. Although rare, transits are important because they help scientists learn about the planet's orbits and have historically been used to measure the size of the solar system. 1. Transit of Mercury: The Transit of Mercury happens when Mercury moves directly between the Earth and the Sun. Since Mercury is small and far from Earth, it appears as a tiny black dot moving across the Sun’s surface. Mercury transits occur about 13 to 14 times every century. 2. Transit of Venus: The Transit of Venus occurs when Venus passes between the Earth and the Sun. Venus is larger than Mercury, so its transit is more visible. However, transits of Venus are rare, occurring in pairs eight years apart, with more than a century between each pair. The most recent transits were in 2004 and 2012, and the next ones will occur in 2117 and 2125. 122 Figure 3: Mercury transiting across the Sun. Figure 4: Venus transiting across the Sun Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 123. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System Effects of Eclipses: Eclipses, especially solar eclipses, have noticeable effects on Earth and its environment. They impact both nature and human perception. 1.Effects of Solar Eclipses: Temperature Drop: During a total solar eclipse, the sudden blockage of sunlight causes a drop in temperature, often by several degrees Celsius. This temperature drop is particularly noticeable in the path of totality, where the Sun is completely obscured. Animal Behavior: The sudden darkness during a solar eclipse can confuse animals. Birds may stop singing, nocturnal animals may emerge, and diurnal animals may prepare for sleep. The eclipse can temporarily disrupt the natural behaviors of wildlife. Observation of the Solar Corona: The Sun’s outer atmosphere, or corona, is usually too faint to be seen due to the brightness of the Sun. However, during a total solar eclipse, the corona becomes visible, offering scientists a rare opportunity to study it in detail. 2. Effects of Lunar Eclipses: Blood Moon: During a total lunar eclipse, the Moon takes on a reddish tint. This happens because the Earth’s atmosphere scatters shorter wavelengths of light (like blue), allowing only the longer wavelengths (red) to pass through and illuminate the Moon. Cultural and Historical Significance: Lunar eclipses have often been interpreted as omens or signs in various cultures. In ancient times, they were sometimes seen as warnings of disaster or messages from the gods. Tidal Effects: While lunar eclipses themselves don’t cause significant tidal changes, the alignment of the Earth, Moon, and Sun during the event can enhance tidal effects due to the combined gravitational forces. 123 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 124. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System Effects of Transits Although transits do not have noticeable effects on Earth like eclipses, they are of significant importance in astronomy and planetary science. 1. Measuring the Astronomical Unit: In the 18th and 19th centuries, transits of Venus were used to measure the Astronomical Unit (AU), the average distance between the Earth and the Sun. By observing the transit from different locations on Earth, astronomers could use the principle of parallax to calculate the distance to the Sun, which in turn helped measure distances within the solar system. 2. Exoplanet Discovery: The transit method is one of the primary techniques used today to discover exoplanets (planets outside our solar system). When a planet passes in front of its star, it causes a slight dip in the star’s brightness, which can be detected by telescopes. NASA's Kepler mission and other space telescopes have used this method to discover thousands of exoplanets. Equations and Calculations Predicting eclipses and transits requires understanding the orbits and motions of celestial bodies. Astronomers use complex equations and models to predict the timing, duration, and visibility of these events. 1. Eclipse Geometry and Calculation: The prediction of eclipses is based on the relative sizes and distances of the Sun, Moon, and Earth, as well as the geometry of their orbits. The Saros cycle, which lasts about 18 years, 11 days, and 8 hours, is used to predict both solar and lunar eclipses. This cycle is based on the fact that the Sun, Earth, and Moon return to nearly the same relative positions after this period. Eclipse Path and Duration: The path of a solar eclipse across the Earth is determined by the Moon’s shadow. The darkest part of the shadow, the umbra, is where a total eclipse occurs, while the lighter penumbra results in a partial eclipse. 124 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 125. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System The duration of a total solar eclipse can be calculated using the following equation: 𝑇eclipse = 2 × 𝑅Earth/𝑣Moon Where: 𝑇eclipse​ is the duration of the eclipse. 𝑅Earth is the radius of the Earth. 𝑣Moon is the velocity of the Moon in its orbit around the Earth. The Moon’s shadow moves across the Earth at about 1,700 kilometers per hour. The duration of totality during a solar eclipse can last up to 7.5 minutes, though most total eclipses are shorter. 2. Transit Geometry and Calculations: The prediction of planetary transits, such as those of Mercury and Venus, relies on knowing the positions of the planets and their orbits. Kepler’s Laws of Planetary Motion are essential for calculating the timing and duration of transits. Kepler’s Laws: Law of Ellipses: Planets move in elliptical orbits, with the Sun at one focus. Law of Equal Areas: A line drawn from a planet to the Sun sweeps out equal areas in equal times. Law of Periods: The square of a planet’s orbital period is proportional to the cube of its semi-major axis. Using Kepler’s laws, astronomers can predict when a transit will occur and how long it will last. Transit Duration: The formula for calculating the duration of a transit is: 𝑇transit = 2 × 𝑅star/𝑣planet Where: 𝑇transit is the transit duration. 𝑅star is the radius of the star (for example, the Sun). 𝑣planet is the velocity of the planet across the face of the star. 125 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 126. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System 3. Parallax and Distance Measurement: During the transits of Venus in the 18th and 19th centuries, astronomers used parallax to measure the distance between Earth and the Sun. The parallax method involves observing the transit from two different points on Earth and measuring the angle of displacement between the two views. The distance to the Sun can then be calculated using the following equation: 𝐷 = 𝑏tan(𝜃) Where: 𝐷 is the distance to the Sun. 𝑏 is the baseline, or the distance between the two observation points on Earth. 𝜃 is the parallax angle. Predictions of Eclipses and Transits: The ability to predict eclipses and transits has greatly improved over time thanks to advancements in astronomy and mathematics. 1. Predicting Solar and Lunar Eclipses: Eclipse prediction is based on precise calculations of the orbits of the Moon and Earth. The Saros cycle, as mentioned earlier, is one of the most reliable methods for predicting when and where eclipses will occur. For example, a solar eclipse that occurs today will have a near-identical eclipse 18 years, 11 days, and 8 hours later. Modern astronomy tools, such as specialized software and high-precision orbital models, allow astronomers to predict eclipses thousands of years into the future. Eclipse maps, which show the path of totality for solar eclipses, can be generated decades in advance, allowing enthusiasts and scientists to prepare for these rare events. 126 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 127. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – The Solar System 2. Predicting Transits of Mercury and Venus The orbits of Mercury and Venus are well-known, allowing astronomers to predict transits with great accuracy. The transits of Venus, in particular, occur in a predictable pattern, with pairs of transits separated by more than 100 years. The next transits of Venus will occur in December 2117 and December 2125.Mercury transits occur more frequently, approximately 13 or 14 times every century. The next Mercury transit is expected to occur in 2032. Conclusion: Eclipses and transits are two extraordinary celestial events that capture the imagination of both scientists and the public. While they may appear as mere visual spectacles, they hold profound scientific significance, helping us measure distances in space, understand planetary orbits, and discover new worlds beyond our solar system. The causes of these phenomena are rooted in the precise alignment of celestial bodies, with eclipses involving the blocking of light and transits involving the passage of smaller objects in front of larger ones. The effects of these events range from observable changes on Earth, such as temperature drops during solar eclipses, to breakthroughs in astronomical research, such as the discovery of exoplanets using the transit method. By applying principles of geometry, physics, and orbital mechanics, astronomers can predict and study these events with remarkable accuracy. Whether you’re witnessing the dramatic darkness of a total solar eclipse or tracking the slow, subtle transit of a planet across the Sun, these events remind us of the intricate and awe-inspiring dynamics of our universe. 127 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 128. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Space Exploration • Space Exploration: Introduction: Space exploration encompasses the investigation of outer space through manned and unmanned missions. It involves the use of technology to gather information about celestial bodies, the universe, and potential habitats for life beyond Earth. This exploration has significantly advanced our understanding of the cosmos and our place within it. 1.Historical Context: 1.1 Early Observations:[ Ancient Astronomy: Civilizations such as the Babylonians, Greeks, and Chinese made early astronomical observations. They documented celestial events and developed models to explain the movements of celestial bodies. Telescopes: The invention of the telescope in the early 17th century revolutionized astronomy. Notable figures like Galileo Galilei used telescopes to make groundbreaking discoveries, including the moons of Jupiter. 1.2 The Space Race: Post-World War II Era: The Cold War rivalry between the United States and the Soviet Union spurred significant advancements in space exploration. Sputnik 1: Launched by the Soviet Union in 1957, it was the first artificial satellite, marking the beginning of the space age and igniting the space race. Human Spaceflight: Yuri Gagarin became the first human in space in 1961, followed by several significant U.S. missions, including John Glenn’s orbit of Earth. 128 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 129. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Space Exploration 1.3 The Apollo Program: Apollo 11: In 1969, Apollo 11 successfully landed the first humans on the Moon—Neil Armstrong and Buzz Aldrin. This marked a pivotal achievement in human space exploration. Subsequent Missions: The Apollo program continued with five more Moon landings, gathering valuable data about the lunar surface and geology. 2. Advancements in Technology: 2.1 Rockets and Launch Vehicles: Launch Systems: Various rocket designs, such as the Saturn V (used in the Apollo missions) and the Space Shuttle, have played crucial roles in launching payloads into space. Reusable Rockets: Companies like SpaceX have pioneered reusable rocket technology, reducing costs and increasing access to space. 2.2 Satellites: Types of Satellites: Communication, weather, reconnaissance, and scientific satellites have revolutionized our ability to observe and understand Earth and other celestial bodies. Global Positioning System (GPS): Satellite technology has enabled precise navigation and timekeeping. 2.3 Space Probes and Rovers: Unmanned Missions: Probes like Voyager 1 and 2 have traveled beyond the Solar System, sending back valuable data about the outer planets and interstellar space. Rovers: Rovers like NASA's Curiosity and Perseverance have explored Mars, conducting experiments and searching for signs of past life. 129 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 130. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Space Exploration 3. Key Missions and Discoveries: 3.1 Robotic Missions: Voyager Program: Launched in 1977, the Voyager probes have provided unprecedented data about the outer planets and are now in interstellar space. Mars Rovers: Missions like Spirit, Opportunity, Curiosity, and Perseverance have significantly advanced our understanding of Mars’ geology and potential for life. 3.2 Human Spaceflight: International Space Station (ISS): A joint project involving multiple countries, the ISS serves as a microgravity laboratory for scientific research and international collaboration. Commercial Spaceflight: Private companies like SpaceX and Blue Origin are developing human spaceflight capabilities, paving the way for commercial ventures beyond Earth. 3.3 Space Telescopes: Hubble Space Telescope: Launched in 1990, Hubble has provided stunning images and data, significantly enhancing our understanding of the universe, including the expansion rate and the existence of exoplanets. James Webb Space Telescope (JWST): Launched in December 2021, JWST aims to observe the universe in infrared, exploring the formation of stars and galaxies. 130 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 131. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Space Exploration 4. Scientific Discoveries: 4.1 Understanding the Universe: Big Bang Theory: Space exploration has supported the Big Bang theory, explaining the universe's origin and expansion. Exoplanets: Discoveries of exoplanets have revolutionized our understanding of potential habitats for life beyond Earth. 4.2 Mars Exploration: Water Evidence: Rovers and orbiters have found evidence of past water on Mars, raising questions about its potential to host life.Sample Return Missions: Upcoming missions aim to bring Martian samples back to Earth for detailed analysis.4.3 Outer Solar System Voyager Discoveries: The Voyager missions provided data about the gas giants (Jupiter and Saturn), their moons, and the characteristics of the Kuiper Belt.New Horizons: The 2015 flyby of Pluto offered insights into this dwarf planet and its moons. 5. Future of Space Exploration: 5.1 Human Exploration of Mars: Artemis Program: NASA’s Artemis program aims to return humans to the Moon by the mid-2020s, establishing a sustainable presence to prepare for future Mars missions. Mars Colonization: Plans for crewed missions to Mars are being developed, with the goal of establishing a human presence on the Red Planet. 131 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 132. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Space Exploration 5.2 Space Tourism: Commercial Ventures: Companies like SpaceX, Blue Origin, and Virgin Galactic are working toward making space tourism a reality, providing opportunities for civilians to experience space travel. 5.3 Astrobiology and Search for Life: Future Missions: Upcoming missions are focused on exploring moons like Europa and Enceladus, which may harbor subsurface oceans and potential for life. SETI Initiatives: The Search for Extraterrestrial Intelligence (SETI) continues to analyze signals from space in the quest for signs of intelligent life.5.4 International Collaboration Global Partnerships: Future exploration will increasingly rely on international collaboration, with countries working together on projects like the ISS and joint planetary missions. Conclusion: Space exploration represents humanity's quest to understand the universe and our place within it. From ancient observations to modern missions that push the boundaries of technology and human capability, our journey into space has yielded remarkable discoveries and technological advancements. As we look to the future, the potential for exploration and discovery remains vast, with the promise of answering fundamental questions about life, the cosmos, and our own existence. 132 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 133. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Stellar Evolution • Stellar Evolution: A Comprehensive Overview Stellar evolution describes the life cycle of stars, from their formation to their ultimate fate. This journey spans millions to billions of years, involving complex physical processes such as nuclear fusion, gravitational collapse, and stellar winds. The evolution of a star depends on its mass, with different stars following distinct evolutionary paths. In this article, we'll explore stellar evolution in detail, breaking down the various stages a star undergoes, including the processes that govern these transformations. 1. Stellar Birth: From Nebula to Protostar Nebula: Stars are born in vast clouds of gas and dust, called nebulae, which contain mainly hydrogen and helium. Over time, gravitational forces cause regions of these clouds to collapse. External factors, such as nearby supernovae, can also trigger the collapse. As the cloud contracts, it begins to heat up and form a dense core called a protostar. The protostar continues to gather material from its surrounding cloud, increasing in temperature and pressure. When the core temperature reaches approximately 10 million Kelvin, nuclear fusion begins. At this point, the star achieves hydrostatic equilibrium, where the inward gravitational pull is balanced by the outward pressure from nuclear reactions. 133 Figure 1: A Nebulae collapsing under gravity with protostar forming in its core. Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 134. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Stellar Evolution 2. The Main Sequence: A Star's Longest Phase The main sequence is the longest and most stable phase in a star's life, where hydrogen is continuously fused into helium in the core. The star’s position on the Hertzsprung-Russell (H-R) Diagram during this phase is determined by its mass and temperature, ranging from hot, blue stars to cool, red stars. The majority of a star's life is spent in this phase. In smaller stars like the Sun, the proton-proton chain is the dominant fusion mechanism. For more massive stars, the CNO cycle (carbon-nitrogen-oxygen) facilitates hydrogen fusion. The rate of fusion and the star's mass directly affect its luminosity and lifespan. Massive stars burn their fuel quickly and live shorter lives, while low-mass stars can persist for billions of years. 2. 3. Diverging Evolutionary Paths: The Role of Mass Stars evolve differently based on their mass. Stellar mass plays a critical role in determining how a star will evolve after exhausting its hydrogen supply in the core. Low-Mass Stars (0.1-0.5 solar masses): Low-mass stars, such as red dwarfs, burn hydrogen at a very slow rate. These stars can live for trillions of years, and due to their slow fusion rate, they never evolve beyond the main sequence within the current age of the universe. 134 Figure 2: Hertzsprung-Russell diagram showing the main sequence stars. Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 135. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Stellar Evolution Intermediate-Mass Stars (0.5-8 solar masses): Stars like the Sun fall into this category. When hydrogen in the core is depleted, they evolve into red giants and eventually shed their outer layers to form planetary nebulae. The core becomes a white dwarf. High-Mass Stars (greater than 8 solar masses): Massive stars have a more dramatic life cycle, leading to their end in supernovae, with their cores potentially forming neutron stars or black holes. 4. Post-Main Sequence Evolution: Red Giant Phase: After exhausting the hydrogen in its core, a star no longer generates sufficient outward pressure to counteract gravity, causing the core to collapse. In turn, the outer layers expand significantly, and the star enters the red giant phase. In the core of the red giant, helium begins to fuse into carbon through the triple-alpha process. The outer layers become cooler and more luminous, giving the star its red hue. Helium Burning and Shell Fusion: In intermediate-mass stars, after the helium in the core is depleted, fusion shifts to shells surrounding the core. Hydrogen and helium fusion occur in concentric shells, while the core contracts further, eventually resulting in the star shedding its outer layers. 135 Figure 3: Evolutionary pathways of low, intermediate, and high-mass stars. Figure 4: A red giant star with expanded outer layers and a contracted core. Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 136. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Stellar Evolution 5. The Final Phases for Low and Intermediate-Mass Stars: Planetary Nebula: In intermediate-mass stars, the red giant sheds its outer layers, creating a beautiful shell of ionized gas known as a planetary nebula. The exposed core of the star, now a white dwarf, emits ultraviolet light, which causes the ejected gas to glow. White Dwarf: The remaining core, now a white dwarf, is composed mainly of carbon and oxygen. No further nuclear fusion occurs in the white dwarf, and it slowly cools over billions of years, eventually becoming a cold, inert black dwarf (though no black dwarfs exist yet, as the universe is too young). 6. High-Mass Star Evolution: More Dramatic Endings Supergiant Phase: For stars more massive than about 8 solar masses, the post-main sequence evolution is much more energetic. These stars expand into supergiants and continue fusing elements heavier than helium. Through a series of nuclear burning stages, elements like carbon, oxygen, neon, and silicon fuse in the core, culminating in the production of iron. Since fusion of iron requires energy rather than releases it, the star can no longer sustain fusion to produce energy. This marks the beginning of the end. 136 Figure 5: A planetary nebula, with a white dwarf at its center and glowing gas surrounding it. Figure 6: A white dwarf surrounded by a planetary nebula Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 137. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Stellar Evolution Supernova: Once the iron core becomes too massive, it collapses under its own gravity, triggering a supernova explosion. The core collapses to an incredibly dense state, while the outer layers are violently expelled into space. Supernovae play a crucial role in the cosmic distribution of heavy elements, seeding the universe with elements necessary for planets and life. 7. The Fate of Massive Stars: Neutron Stars and Black Holes: Neutron Stars: If the remaining core after a supernova has a mass between 1.4 and 3 times that of the Sun, it will collapse into a neutron star. These incredibly dense objects are composed almost entirely of neutrons. Some neutron stars spin rapidly, emitting beams of radiation from their magnetic poles, known as pulsars. 137 Figure 7: Structure of a supergiant star, with multiple fusion shells around an iron core. Figure 8: Supernova explosion, ejecting material into space. Figure 9: Neutron star with its magnetic poles emitting radiation as a pulsar. Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 138. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Stellar Evolution Black Holes: If the core remaining after a supernova exceeds three solar masses, it collapses into a black hole, a region of space where gravity is so strong that nothing, not even light, can escape. Material that falls into the black hole forms an accretion disk, which emits intense radiation as it spirals inward. 8. Stellar Recycling and Galactic Enrichment: The ejected material from planetary nebulae and supernovae enriches the interstellar medium with heavy elements such as carbon, oxygen, and iron. This "recycling" of stellar material is crucial for the formation of new stars, planets, and eventually life. Star Formation: Nebulae enriched with elements from previous generations of stars collapse to form new stars, continuing the cycle of stellar evolution. This process highlights the interconnection of stars, planets, and life in the universe. 138 Figure 10: A black hole surrounded by an accretion disk. Figure 11: The cycle of stellar formation and death, showing how material from dying stars contributes to the formation of new ones. Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 139. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Stellar Evolution Summary of Stellar Evolution Stages: Conclusion: Stellar evolution is a fascinating and complex process, driven by the interplay of nuclear fusion, gravity, and the mass of the star. From the birth of stars in nebulae to their deaths as white dwarfs, neutron stars, or black holes, the life cycle of a star is a vital part of the cosmic ecosystem. Understanding stellar evolution not only sheds light on the mechanics of the universe but also on the origins of the elements that make up planets and life itself. 139 Stage Mass Range Key Process Outcome Nebula All masses Gravitational collapse of gas and dust Protostar Main Sequence 0.1–100 solar masses Hydrogen fusion in the core Red Giant/Supergiant Red Giant 0.5–8 solar masses Helium fusion in the core, shell fusion of hydrogen Planetary Nebula, White Dwarf Supergiant >8 solar masses Fusion of heavier elements until iron forms in the core Supernova White Dwarf 0.5–8 solar masses Gradual cooling of degenerate carbon- oxygen core Black Dwarf (theoretical) Neutron Star 1.4–3 solar masses Collapse of core into neutrons Pulsar (in some cases) Black Hole >3 solar masses Core collapses beyond neutron degeneracy pressure Singularity, Event Horizon Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 140. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Galactic Evolution • Galactic Structure, Composition, and Evolution: 1. Introduction to Galaxies Galaxies are vast systems of stars, gas, dust, and dark matter bound together by gravity. They serve as the fundamental building blocks of the universe and play a vital role in its structure and evolution. Understanding galaxies provides insights into the processes of star formation, the dynamics of cosmic structures, and the overall history of the universe. 1.1 Importance of Studying Galaxies Studying galaxies is essential for answering fundamental questions about the nature of the universe, including the formation of stars and planetary systems, the evolution of cosmic structures, and the interplay of dark matter and energy. By examining galaxies, astronomers can piece together the story of the cosmos from its inception to its eventual fate. 140 Figure 1: Diagram illustrating the components of a spiral galaxy, highlighting the bulge, disk, spiral arms, and halo. Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 141. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Galactic Evolution 2. Galactic Structure Galaxies exhibit a diverse range of structures, each with unique features. The primary components of galaxies can be classified into distinct regions. 2.1 Components of Galaxies Bulge: The bulge is the central, rounded region of a galaxy, typically containing a high density of older stars, gas, and dust. It often harbors a supermassive black hole at its center, influencing the dynamics of the surrounding region. Bulges can vary in size, shape, and stellar population. Disk: A flat, rotating region that surrounds the bulge, containing stars, gas, and dust. The disk is where most star formation occurs, particularly in the spiral arms. It contains a mix of old and young stars, along with regions of active star formation. Halo: A spherical region surrounding the galaxy that contains older stars, globular clusters, and dark matter. The halo extends well beyond the visible components of the galaxy and is characterized by low-density stellar populations. Spiral Arms: Found in spiral galaxies, these are regions of higher density where star formation is particularly active. The spiral arms are characterized by bright, young stars and often contain molecular clouds and HII regions. Dark Matter Halo: An invisible component that constitutes most of a galaxy’s mass, inferred from gravitational effects on visible matter. Dark matter does not emit or absorb light, making it challenging to detect directly. 141 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 142. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Galactic Evolution 2.2 Morphological Classification of Galaxies Galaxies are classified based on their morphology into several types: Spiral Galaxies: Characterized by a flat disk with spiral arms and a central bulge. They are rich in gas and dust, and actively forming stars. Examples include the Milky Way and the Andromeda Galaxy. Elliptical Galaxies: These have an ellipsoidal shape and are mostly composed of older stars, with little gas and dust. They are generally classified from E0 (nearly spherical) to E7 (more elongated). Irregular Galaxies: Lack a distinct shape and often appear chaotic. They are typically rich in gas and dust and exhibit active star formation. Lenticular Galaxies: Intermediate between spiral and elliptical galaxies, possessing a central bulge and a disk but lacking significant spiral structure. 142 Figure 2: Hubble classification scheme illustrating different types of galaxies. Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 143. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Galactic Evolution 3. Composition of Galaxies The composition of galaxies encompasses various components that contribute to their overall structure and dynamics. 3.1 Stellar Population Population I Stars: Young, metal-rich stars found in the disk and spiral arms, actively forming from the interstellar medium (ISM). These stars are typically hot and luminous. Population II Stars: Older stars located in the bulge and halo, characterized by lower metallicity and minimal ongoing star formation. They are generally cooler and less luminous than Population I stars. Population III Stars: Hypothetical first stars formed after the Big Bang, composed almost entirely of hydrogen and helium. They are believed to have been very massive and short-lived, playing a crucial role in reionizing the universe. 143 Figure 3: Diagram showing the distribution of the interstellar medium in a spiral galaxy, highlighting molecular clouds and HII regions. Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 144. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Galactic Evolution 3.2 Interstellar Medium (ISM) The ISM consists of the matter that exists in the space between stars within a galaxy. It plays a crucial role in star formation: Molecular Clouds: Dense regions of gas where star formation occurs. These clouds are the primary sites of new stellar creation and are typically composed of hydrogen molecules. HII Regions: Areas of ionized hydrogen around young, hot stars, indicating regions of active star formation. These regions are often associated with bright emission nebulae. 3.3 Dark Matter Dark matter is a significant component of galaxies, making up about 85% of their total mass. Its presence is inferred from gravitational effects on visible matter: Evidence for Dark Matter: Observations of galaxy rotation curves and gravitational lensing provide indirect evidence for dark matter's existence. Galaxies rotate at such speeds that, without dark matter, they would not be able to hold themselves together. Dark Matter Halo: The dark matter halo surrounds the visible components of galaxies, influencing their gravitational binding and dynamics. 144 Figure 4: Diagram illustrating the rotation curves of galaxies and the influence of dark matter on their structure. Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 145. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Galactic Evolution 4. Evolution of Galaxies Galactic evolution involves the processes that shape galaxies over cosmic time, from their formation to their ultimate fate. 4.1 Formation of Galaxies Early Universe: Following the Big Bang, the universe cooled, allowing protons and neutrons to form hydrogen and helium nuclei. Small density fluctuations in the primordial gas led to the formation of the first stars and galaxies. Hierarchical Merging: Galaxies formed through the merging of smaller proto- galaxies. This process, known as hierarchical clustering, continues to influence galaxy evolution today. Larger galaxies gradually grew by accreting smaller ones, leading to the diverse range of galactic morphologies observed today. 145 Figure 5: Simulation showing the hierarchical merging of proto-galaxies in the early universe. Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 146. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Galactic Evolution 4.2 Star Formation and Feedback Mechanisms Star Formation: Stars form from the gravitational collapse of gas in molecular clouds. The rate of star formation varies among different types of galaxies and is influenced by the availability of gas. Factors such as density, temperature, and external pressures can affect the star formation rate. Feedback Mechanisms: The energy released from supernovae, stellar winds, and active galactic nuclei (AGN) can heat and expel gas from galaxies, regulating star formation. This feedback can lead to the quenching of star formation in certain galaxies. 4.3 Galactic Mergers and Interactions Galaxies frequently interact and merge, leading to significant changes in their structure: Major Mergers: Occur between galaxies of similar mass, often resulting in dramatic increases in star formation as gas is compressed. These mergers can lead to the formation of elliptical galaxies from spirals. Minor Mergers: Involve a larger galaxy accreting smaller satellite galaxies. These interactions can redistribute stars and gas, influencing the evolution of the larger galaxy. 146 Figure 6: A simulation of a major merger between two spiral galaxies, illustrating the star formation triggered by gravitational interactions. Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 147. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Galactic Evolution 4.4 Role of Active Galactic Nuclei (AGN) Supermassive black holes at the centers of galaxies can become active, leading to the formation of active galactic nuclei (AGN). These regions emit vast amounts of energy and can significantly affect their host galaxies: Types of AGN: Include quasars, Seyfert galaxies, and blazars, each characterized by their unique spectral signatures and luminosities. Impact on Evolution: AGN feedback can regulate star formation by heating the surrounding gas, preventing it from collapsing to form new stars. This process can create a balance between star formation and AGN activity. 5. The Life Cycle of Galaxies 5.1 Star Formation Histories The star formation history of a galaxy reflects its evolutionary path. Different galaxies exhibit varying rates and patterns of star formation based on their environments and interactions. Starburst Galaxies: These galaxies experience rapid star formation over a short period, often triggered by interactions or mergers. This intense activity can consume available gas, leading to a decline in star formation rates afterward. Quiescent Galaxies: Galaxies that exhibit little to no star formation. These typically include older elliptical galaxies, which have exhausted their gas supply. 147 Figure 7: Graph depicting star formation rates over cosmic time, showing the evolution of different types of galaxies. Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 148. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Galactic Evolution 5.2 The Fate of Galaxies As galaxies evolve, their fate will be determined by various factors, including their mass, interactions, and the availability of gas. Dry Mergers: Over time, many galaxies will merge, leading to “dry mergers” where little new star formation occurs due to the depletion of gas. This process can lead to the growth of massive elliptical galaxies. Distant Future: In the far future, the universe will likely become increasingly dominated by red, dead galaxies with minimal star formation. The Milky Way, for example, will collide with Andromeda, potentially forming a single large galaxy. 5.3 Cosmic Recycling The lifecycle of stars within galaxies contributes to the enrichment of the interstellar medium with heavy elements, which are essential for forming new stars and planetary systems. This process, often referred to as cosmic recycling, plays a critical role in galactic evolution: Supernova Explosions: When massive stars exhaust their nuclear fuel, they explode as supernovae, dispersing elements such as carbon, oxygen, and iron into the ISM. This material enriches the gas from which new stars form. Planetary Nebulae: Less massive stars end their lives by shedding their outer layers, forming planetary nebulae that release enriched material back into the ISM. 148 Figure 8: Diagram showing the recycling of stellar material through supernovae and planetary nebulae into the ISM. Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 149. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Galactic Evolution 6. Observational Techniques in Galactic Astronomy Understanding galaxies relies on various observational techniques, each providing unique insights into their structure and evolution. 6.1 Photometry and Spectroscopy Photometry: Measures the brightness of galaxies in different wavelengths, helping to determine their stellar populations and star formation rates. It provides information about the distribution of stars and the presence of dust. Spectroscopy: Analyzes the light from galaxies to reveal their chemical composition, velocity, and distance. It is essential for understanding the dynamics of galaxies and the nature of their stellar populations. 6.2 Radio Observations Radio Telescopes: Used to study the cold gas in galaxies, including neutral hydrogen (HI) and molecular clouds. This is critical for understanding star formation processes and the distribution of gas within galaxies. 149 Figure 9: Image of a galaxy observed in radio wavelengths, highlighting regions of cold gas. Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 150. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Galactic Evolution 6.3 Gravitational Lensing Gravitational Lensing: A powerful tool for studying dark matter distribution in galaxies. The bending of light from distant objects provides insights into the mass and structure of galaxies. 6.4 Infrared and X-ray Observations Infrared Observations: Useful for studying dust-enshrouded regions of star formation, allowing astronomers to see through the dust and observe star-forming regions. X-ray Observations: Provide insights into the hot gas in galaxy clusters and the activity of supermassive black holes. X-ray emission can indicate regions of high-energy processes, such as starbursts or AGN activity. 150 Figure 10: Example of gravitational lensing showing the distortion of background galaxies due to a foreground galaxy’s mass. Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 151. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Galactic Evolution 7. Case Studies in Galactic Evolution 7.1 The Milky Way Galaxy The Milky Way is a barred spiral galaxy, home to our solar system. Its structure, composition, and evolution provide a model for understanding other galaxies. Structure: The Milky Way's structure includes a central bulge, a flat disk with spiral arms, and a vast halo of dark matter. It hosts various stellar populations, including Population I and II stars. Star Formation: Active star formation occurs primarily in the spiral arms, with numerous regions of ongoing star formation. Future: The Milky Way is on a collision course with the Andromeda Galaxy, expected to occur in about 4.5 billion years, leading to significant structural changes. 7.2 The Andromeda Galaxy Andromeda (M31) is the nearest spiral galaxy to the Milky Way and serves as an important case study for galactic interactions. Structure: Andromeda has a prominent central bulge and extensive spiral arms rich in gas and young stars. Mergers: It has experienced numerous minor mergers with satellite galaxies, which have contributed to its growth and evolution. Future Interaction: The impending merger with the Milky Way will create a new galaxy, potentially altering the star formation dynamics in both galaxies. 151 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 152. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Galactic Evolution 7.3 The Triangulum Galaxy Triangulum (M33) is another nearby spiral galaxy, smaller than both the Milky Way and Andromeda, but significant for its distinct structure. Structure: Triangulum has a well-defined spiral structure with prominent arms, and its stellar populations are primarily young, indicating active star formation. Role in the Local Group: As a member of the Local Group, Triangulum provides insights into the dynamics of galaxy interactions and the evolution of smaller galaxies. 8. Future Directions in Galactic Research The study of galaxies is an evolving field, with new technologies and methods continually enhancing our understanding of galactic structure and evolution. 8.1 Upcoming Observatories James Webb Space Telescope (JWST): Launched in December 2021, JWST is expected to revolutionize our understanding of galaxies by observing them in infrared wavelengths, providing insights into star formation and the early universe. Square Kilometer Array (SKA): This upcoming radio telescope will enable high-resolution observations of neutral hydrogen across the universe, shedding light on galaxy formation and evolution. 152 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 153. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Galactic Evolution 8.2 Simulation and Modeling Advancements in computational astrophysics are enhancing our ability to simulate galaxy formation and evolution. Large-scale simulations help researchers understand the complex interactions and dynamics of galaxies. 8.3 Exploring Dark Matter and Energy Understanding dark matter and dark energy remains a crucial frontier in astrophysics. Ongoing research aims to elucidate their roles in galaxy formation, structure, and the fate of the universe. 9. Conclusion Galaxies are complex systems with rich structures, compositions, and evolutionary histories. Understanding their formation and evolution is vital for piecing together the history of the universe. As research advances, our knowledge of galaxies will continue to expand, revealing even more about their role in the cosmos. 153 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 154. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Cosmology •Cosmology: An In-Depth Exploration 1. Introduction to Cosmology Cosmology is the scientific study of the universe's origin, evolution, structure, and eventual fate. It combines insights from astronomy, physics, and mathematics to address fundamental questions about the cosmos. 1.1 Importance of Cosmology Understanding cosmology allows us to answer questions about: The origin of the universe. The nature and distribution of matter and energy. The ultimate fate of the universe. 2. Historical Background 2.1 Ancient Cosmologies Mythological Views: Early civilizations developed mythological explanations for cosmic phenomena, often involving deities and creation myths. Geocentric Model: In ancient Greece, thinkers like Aristotle and Ptolemy proposed that Earth was the universe's center, a view that persisted for centuries. 2.2 The Heliocentric Model Copernicus: Proposed the heliocentric model, which positioned the Sun at the center of the solar system, challenging the geocentric view. Galileo: Provided observational support for the heliocentric model, notably through telescopic observations of celestial bodies. 154 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 155. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Cosmology 2.3 Modern Cosmology Hubble's Discovery: Edwin Hubble's observations in the 1920s revealed that distant galaxies are receding from us, leading to the understanding that the universe is expanding. 3. Fundamental Principles of Cosmology 3.1 The Cosmological Principle The cosmological principle states that the universe is homogeneous and isotropic when viewed on large scales: Homogeneous: Uniformity in matter distribution across vast distances. Isotropic: Identical appearance of the universe in all directions. 3.2 The Friedmann-Lemaître-Robertson-Walker (FLRW) Metric The FLRW metric describes a universe that is both homogeneous and isotropic. It is represented mathematically by the line element: ds2 = − c2dt2 + a2(t)[dr2/(1 − kr2) + r2(dθ2 + sin2θ dϕ2)] Where: ds2 : Spacetime interval. c : Speed of light. a(t) : Scale factor, describing how distances in the universe change with time. k: Curvature of space (0 for flat, +1 for closed, -1 for open). 155 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 156. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Cosmology 3.3 Scale Factor and Expansion of the Universe The scale factor a(t) quantifies the expansion of the universe: a(t) = R(t)/R0 Where: R(t): Size of the universe at time ttt. R0 : Size of the universe at the present time. 3.4 The Friedmann Equations The Friedmann equations describe the dynamics of cosmic expansion, derived from Einstein's field equations: First Friedmann Equation: (a˙/a)2 = (8πG/3)ρ − kc2/a2 + Λc2/3 Second Friedmann Equation: a¨a = − (4πG/3)(ρ + 3p/c2) + Λc2/3 Where: a˙˙: Time derivative of the scale factor (expansion rate). ρ: Density of the universe. p: Pressure of the universe. G: Gravitational constant. Λ: Cosmological constant. 156 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 157. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Cosmology 4. Structure of the Universe 4.1 Large-Scale Structure The universe exhibits a complex large-scale structure composed of galaxies, galaxy clusters, and superclusters. The distribution can be visualized through: Galaxy Filaments: Massive threads of galaxies and dark matter. Voids: Vast empty spaces between galaxy filaments. 4.2 The Cosmic Web The cosmic web is a pattern of galaxy distribution that resembles a web, with dense regions (filaments and clusters) and large voids. This structure results from gravitational interactions and the expansion of the universe. 157 Figure 1: Visualization of the large-scale structure of the universe. Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 158. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Cosmology 5. Composition of the Universe 5.1 Ordinary Matter (Baryonic Matter) Ordinary matter constitutes about 5% of the universe. This includes: Stars Planets Gas and dust 5.2 Dark Matter Dark matter is a form of matter that does not emit light or energy, making it invisible and detectable only through its gravitational effects. It makes up approximately 27% of the universe. Evidence for Dark Matter: Galactic Rotation Curves: Observations show that stars in galaxies rotate at speeds that cannot be explained by the visible mass alone. Gravitational Lensing: Light from distant galaxies is bent around massive objects, indicating unseen mass. 158 Figure 2: Diagram illustrating the effect of dark matter on galaxy rotation curves. Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 159. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Cosmology 5.3 Dark Energy Dark energy is a mysterious force driving the accelerated expansion of the universe, accounting for about 68% of its total energy density. Its nature is still not fully understood. Equation of State: The equation of state parameter www relates pressure p to density ρ: w = p/ρc2 Where: w ≈ −1 for dark energy. 6. The Expanding Universe 6.1 Hubble's Law Hubble's Law describes the relationship between a galaxy's distance and its recessional velocity: v = H0d Where: v: Recessional velocity of a galaxy. H0 : Hubble constant (rate of expansion of the universe). d: Distance to the galaxy. 159 Figure 3: Illustration of the cosmic microwave background radiation. Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 160. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Cosmology 6.2 Cosmic Microwave Background (CMB) The CMB is the remnant radiation from the Big Bang, providing crucial evidence for the hot early state of the universe. It is a nearly uniform blackbody spectrum with a temperature of about 2.7 K. 6.3 Structure Formation Large-scale structure formation in the universe occurred through gravitational instabilities in the early universe, leading to the clustering of matter into galaxies and galaxy clusters. 7. Key Equations in Cosmology 7.1 Einstein's Field Equations The foundation of general relativity relates the geometry of spacetime to the energy content: Gμν = (8πG/c4)Tμν ​Where: Gμν : Einstein tensor representing curvature. Tμν : Energy-momentum tensor. 160 Figure 4: Visualization of cosmic structure formation over time. Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 161. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Cosmology 7.2 Critical Density The critical density ρcrho_cρc determines the geometry of the universe: ρc = 3H0 2/8πG 7.3 Age of the Universe The age of the universe can be estimated from the Hubble constant: t0 = 1/H0 Where: H0 is expressed in kilometers per second per megaparsec (km/s/Mpc). 8. Observational Techniques in Cosmology 8.1 Telescopes and Surveys Various telescopes and observational surveys are essential for studying cosmic structures and the universe's expansion: Optical and Radio Telescopes: Observe galaxies and cosmic structures. Space Telescopes: Such as the Hubble Space Telescope, provide insights into distant galaxies and the early universe. 161 Figure 5: Example of gravitational lensing showing distorted images of distant galaxies. Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 162. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Cosmology 8.2 Gravitational Lensing Gravitational lensing enables astronomers to study dark matter distribution and the curvature of space. 8.3 Supernova Observations Type Ia supernovae serve as standard candles for measuring cosmic distances and understanding the universe's expansion. 9. Future Directions in Cosmology 9.1 Upcoming Observatories James Webb Space Telescope (JWST): Launched to study the universe in infrared wavelengths, revealing star formation and the early universe. Square Kilometer Array (SKA): An upcoming radio telescope that will enable high-resolution observations of neutral hydrogen across the universe. 9.2 Simulation and Modeling Advancements in computational astrophysics enhance our ability to simulate galaxy formation and evolution, allowing for better understanding of the cosmos. 9.3 Exploring Dark Matter and Energy Ongoing research aims to elucidate the roles of dark matter and dark energy, investigating their properties through experiments and observations. 162 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 163. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Cosmology 10. Conclusion Cosmology is a multifaceted field that unravels the mysteries of the universe's origin, structure, and evolution. Through theoretical frameworks, observational evidence, and advanced technology, cosmologists continue to deepen our understanding of the cosmos and its fundamental components. 163 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 164. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Astronomical Measurements • Astronomical Observations and Measurements with Instruments 1. Introduction to Astronomical Measurements: Astronomical measurements aim to quantify various properties of celestial objects, such as: Distance Mass Motion Size Temperature Composition Magnetic Fields Each of these properties can be measured using a variety of instruments, ranging from simple optical telescopes to advanced space-based observatories. 2. Measuring Distances in Astronomy: 2.1 Parallax Principle: Parallax is the apparent displacement of a star when viewed from different positions (usually opposite sides of Earth's orbit). It allows us to measure distances to nearby stars. 𝑑 = 1/𝑝 Where: 𝑑: Distance in parsecs.𝑝p: Parallax angle in arcseconds. Instruments: Ground-based Telescopes: Used historically to measure stellar parallax for nearby stars. ESA's Gaia Spacecraft: Measures parallax with unprecedented precision for billions of stars. 164 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 165. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Astronomical Measurements Method: The telescope measures the angular position of a star relative to distant stars at different times of the year, and the parallax angle is calculated. 2.2 Standard Candles Principle: Certain astronomical objects, like Cepheid variables and Type Ia supernovae, have a known intrinsic brightness (luminosity). By measuring their apparent brightness, their distance can be determined using the inverse-square law of light: 𝑑 = (𝐿/4𝜋𝐵) Where: 𝑑: Distance to the object.𝐿L: Luminosity. 𝐵: Observed brightness. Instruments: Optical Telescopes: Ground-based and space telescopes (like Hubble Space Telescope) equipped with photometers or CCDs (charge-coupled devices) measure the apparent brightness of standard candles. Method: Astronomers observe periodic brightness changes in Cepheid variables or measure the peak brightness of supernovae, which allows the calculation of distance based on their intrinsic luminosity. 165 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 166. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Astronomical Measurements 3. Measuring the Motion of Celestial Objects 3.1 Radial Velocity (Doppler Effect) Principle: The radial velocity of an object, or its velocity along the line of sight, is measured through the Doppler shift of its spectral lines. When an object moves toward the observer, its light shifts to shorter (bluer) wavelengths (blueshift), and when it moves away, it shifts to longer (redder) wavelengths (redshift). 𝑣 = 𝑐(Δ𝜆/𝜆0) Where: 𝑣: Radial velocity. 𝑐: Speed of light. Δ𝜆: Shift in the wavelength of a spectral line. 𝜆0 : Rest wavelength. Instruments: Spectrographs: Devices attached to telescopes that disperse light into its component wavelengths. Instruments like HARPS (High Accuracy Radial velocity Planet Searcher) on the European Southern Observatory's 3.6m telescope measure the tiny Doppler shifts due to planet-star interactions. Method: By examining the shift in spectral lines from a star, the velocity at which the star (and its planets) is moving toward or away from Earth is determined. 166 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 167. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Astronomical Measurements 3.2 Proper Motion Principle: Proper motion is the apparent motion of a star across the sky relative to distant background stars, measured in arcseconds per year. Instruments: Astrometry Telescopes: The ESA Gaia mission precisely measures the positions and proper motions of over a billion stars. Ground-based Telescopes: Historical photographic plates and modern CCD-equipped telescopes measure the change in a star's position over time. Method: By measuring the star's position over many years, astronomers calculate how it moves across the sky. Combined with radial velocity, this gives a full picture of the star's velocity in space. 4. Measuring the Size and Diameter of Celestial Objects 4.1 Angular Diameter: Principle: The angular diameter 𝜃 of an object is the apparent size of the object in the sky. Using its known distance, the physical size 𝐷 can be calculated: 𝐷 = 𝜃 × 𝑑 Where: 𝐷: Actual diameter of the object. 𝜃: Angular diameter in radians. 𝑑: Distance to the object. 167 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 168. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Astronomical Measurements Instruments: Telescopes with CCD Cameras: Measure the angular size of planets, stars, and galaxies. Interferometers: The Very Large Telescope Interferometer (VLTI) uses multiple telescopes to resolve the angular sizes of distant stars with extreme precision. Method: The angular size of objects like planets or stars is observed through high-resolution imaging, and their physical size is calculated using the known distance. 4.2 Lunar Occultation Principle: A celestial object’s size can be determined when it passes behind the Moon (an occultation). As the Moon covers or reveals the object, diffraction patterns provide insights into its angular size. Instruments: Telescopes with High-Speed Cameras: These capture the diffraction pattern during occultation events. Method: Astronomers observe the time and diffraction patterns when the object is occulted, which helps determine its angular size and hence its diameter. 168 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 169. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Astronomical Measurements 5. Measuring Mass in Astronomy 5.1 Binary Star Systems (Kepler’s Laws) Principle: The masses of stars in a binary system can be calculated using Kepler's Third Law: 𝑃2 = [4𝜋2𝐺/(𝑀1 + 𝑀2)]𝑎3 Where: 𝑃: Orbital period. 𝑀1 & M2 : Masses of the stars. 𝑎: Semi-major axis of the orbit. G : Gravitational constant. Instruments: Radial Velocity Spectrographs: Measure the velocity shifts in binary star systems, allowing the calculation of orbital parameters and mass. Interferometers: Precisely measure the separation of binary stars, contributing to mass measurements. Method: By measuring the orbital motion of stars in a binary system, astronomers can deduce the masses of the stars involved. 5.2 Gravitational Lensing Principle: Massive objects like galaxies bend the path of light from more distant objects due to their gravity. The amount of bending provides insights into the mass of the lensing object. Instruments: Optical Telescopes: Instruments like the Hubble Space Telescope observe the lensing effect of distant galaxies.Ground- based Telescopes: Large telescopes such as Keck and VLT are also used for gravitational lensing observations. Method: Astronomers analyze the distortion of background galaxies to estimate the mass distribution of the foreground galaxy or cluster acting as the lens. 169 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 170. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Astronomical Measurements 6. Measuring Composition of Celestial Objects 6.1 Spectroscopy Principle: The composition of stars and planets can be determined by analyzing their spectra. Each element emits or absorbs light at specific wavelengths, producing characteristic spectral lines. Instruments: Prism or Grating Spectrographs: These disperse light into its constituent wavelengths. For example, the Echelle Spectrograph offers high-resolution spectral data for stars and galaxies. Method: The light from a star or planet is passed through a spectrograph. The pattern of absorption or emission lines reveals the chemical elements present, their abundance, and other properties like temperature and pressure. 6.2 Polarimetry Principle: Polarization of light provides insights into the scattering processes occurring in a star’s atmosphere or interstellar dust clouds, as well as magnetic fields. Instruments: Polarimeters: Instruments attached to telescopes that measure the polarization of incoming light, used to study stellar magnetic fields and interstellar dust. Method: By measuring the degree and direction of polarization, astronomers gain information about the scattering mechanisms and the presence of magnetic fields around stars and planets. 170 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 171. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Astronomical Measurements 7. Measuring Temperature of Celestial Objects 7.1 Wien’s Law (Blackbody Radiation) Principle: The temperature of stars and planets can be deduced from their blackbody spectrum. Wien’s Law relates the peak wavelength 𝜆max of the emission to the temperature 𝑇 of the object: 𝜆max = 𝑏/𝑇 Where: 𝑏 = 2.897 × 10−3 m K : Wien’s displacement constant. 𝑇: Temperature of the object. 𝜆max : Wavelength of peak emission. Instruments: Optical and Infrared Spectrographs: Measure the spectrum of stars and planets.Infrared Telescopes: Telescopes like the James Webb Space Telescope (JWST) specialize in observing the infrared spectrum, where cooler objects radiate more energy. Method: The peak wavelength of the star's emitted light is measured, and Wien's law is applied to determine its surface temperature. 171 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 172. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Astronomical Measurements 8. Measuring Magnetic Fields 8.1 Zeeman Effect Principle: The splitting of spectral lines in the presence of a magnetic field is known as the Zeeman effect. The amount of splitting provides a measure of the magnetic field's strength. Instruments: Spectropolarimeters: Combine spectroscopy and polarimetry to measure the magnetic fields of stars, planets, and interstellar clouds. Method: The light from a star is analyzed for the presence of split spectral lines, which directly relates to the strength of the magnetic field surrounding the star. 9. Gravitational Waves 9.1 Laser Interferometry Principle: Gravitational waves, predicted by Einstein’s General Theory of Relativity, are ripples in spacetime caused by massive accelerating bodies such as merging black holes. These waves are detected by measuring tiny changes in the distance between two objects. Instruments: LIGO (Laser Interferometer Gravitational-Wave Observatory): Uses laser interferometry to detect gravitational waves by observing minuscule distortions in spacetime. VIRGO: A similar detector, based in Europe, complements LIGO in detecting gravitational waves. Method: Gravitational waves passing through Earth cause small changes in the length of the laser arms in LIGO. These changes are detected and analyzed to understand the source of the waves, such as the merging of two black holes. 172 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh
  • 173. Astronomy/Astrophysics Preparation Camp – Astronomical Measurements 10. Conclusion Astronomical observations and measurements are at the core of understanding the cosmos. With the help of sophisticated instruments like telescopes, spectrographs, interferometers, and gravitational wave detectors, we can probe the vast distances, immense energies, and intricate processes that govern the universe. As technology advances, these measurements continue to become more precise, opening new windows into the study of the stars, galaxies, and the underlying physics of space. 173 N.B: If any items are felt not be included well as per syllabus as provided earlier, then that part/parts can be clarified from internet browsing.
  • 174. Astronomy/Astrophysics Olympiad Camp Thank You 174 Sukalyan Bachhar, Senior Curator, National Museum of Science & Technology, Bangladesh